MINI Owners Manual F56 Cooper SE SOP 3-2022

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI COOPER SE.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C300 - II/21
WELCOME TO MINI.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to
enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information.............................................................................................................................. 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering.................................................................................................................................. 16
Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................19
On the road............................................................................................................................ 23
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32
Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36
Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 44
General settings................................................................................................................... 48
Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................60
MINI eDRIVE........................................................................................................................62
Safety of the high-voltage system.................................................................................. 65
CONTROLS
Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 68
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel.................................................................................. 87
Transporting children safely............................................................................................ 97
Driving..................................................................................................................................102
Displays................................................................................................................................ 120
Lights.................................................................................................................................... 138
Safety.....................................................................................................................................144
Driving stability control systems.................................................................................168
Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 173
4
Climate control...................................................................................................................192
Interior equipment............................................................................................................199
Storage compartments.....................................................................................................210
Cargo area............................................................................................................................213
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 220
Increasing range................................................................................................................224
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle........................................................................................................ 230
Wheels and tires................................................................................................................239
Engine compartment........................................................................................................255
Coolant..................................................................................................................................258
Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 260
Replacing components.................................................................................................... 262
Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 267
Care........................................................................................................................................273
REFERENCE
Technical data.................................................................................................................... 278
Appendix..............................................................................................................................280
Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................282
© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 II/21, 03 21 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Internet
Vehicle information and general informa-
Orientation tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-
ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
The fastest way to find information on a
particular topic is by using the index.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
An initial overview of the vehicle is pro- vehicle
vided in the first chapter.
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
Updates made after the editorial describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
deadline can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, ditional information, refer to page 60.
differences may exist between the printed
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's MINI Motorer’s Guide app
Manual in the vehicle.
The app specifically describes features and
Notes on updates can be found in the ap- functions found in the vehicle. The app can
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for be displayed on smartphones and tablets.
the vehicle.
MINI Motorer’s Guide Web
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-
Entertainment, Communication ble information for the selected vehicle. If
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- possible, only equipment and functions that
tainment, and Communication can be ob- are actually installed in the vehicle will be
tained as a printed book from the service explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-
center. played in any current browser.
The topics are also discussed in the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Symbols and displays
Additional sources of informa- Symbols in the Owner's Manual
tion
Icon Meaning
Service center Precautions that must be followed
A service center will be glad to answer in order to avoid the possibility of
questions at any time. injury to yourself and to others as
well as serious damage to the
vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
6
Information NOTES
Icon Meaning components results in the risk of life-threat-

ening injury from electric shock.
"..." Control Display texts used to select
individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the Vehicle features and options
voice activation system.
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice This Owner's Manual describes all models
activation system. and all standard, country-specific and op-
tional equipment that is offered in the
Action steps model series. Therefore, this Owner's
Manual also describes and illustrates fea-
Action steps to be carried out are presented tures and functions that are not available in
as a numbered list. The steps must be car- a vehicle, for example because of the se-
ried out in the defined order. lected optional features or the country-spe-
1. First action step. cific version.
2. Second action step. This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
Enumerations When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
Enumerations without mandatory order or
observed.
alternative possibilities are presented as a
list with bullet points. For any options and equipment not descri-
bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the
– First possibility.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
– Second possibility.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-
swer any questions that you may have
Icons on vehicle components about the features and options applicable to
This symbol on a vehicle component your vehicle.
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's
Manual. Status of the Owner's Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con-
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue
to embody the highest quality and safety
standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-
tures described in this Owner's Manual may
differ from those in your vehicle.
The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate
that incorrect use of high-voltage equip-
ment or of orange-colored high-voltage
7
NOTES Information
Updates made after the editorial information on warranty is available from a

deadline service center.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
differences may exist between the printed
Maintenance and repairs
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Advanced technology, for instance the use
Manual in the vehicle. of modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires suitable maintenance
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
and repair work.
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for
the vehicle. The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you entrust corresponding pro-
cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If
For Your Own Safety you choose to use another service facility,
the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends use of a facility that performs work,
Manufacturer e.g., maintenance and repair, according to
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri- MINI specifications with properly trained
sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, personnel, referred to in the Owner's
BMW AG. Manual as "another qualified service center
or repair shop".
Intended use If work is performed improperly, for in-
Heed the following when using the vehicle: stance maintenance and repair, there is a
risk of subsequent damage and related
– Owner's Manual. safety risks.
– Information on the vehicle. Do not re- Improperly performed work on the vehicle
move stickers. paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of
– Technical vehicle data. components, e.g., the radar sensors, and
– The traffic, speed, and safety laws where thereby result in a safety risk.
the vehicle is driven.
– Vehicle documents and statutory docu- Parts and accessories
ments. The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends the use of parts and accessory prod-
Warranty ucts approved by the manufacturer of the
Your vehicle is technically configured for MINI.
the operating conditions and registration Approved parts and accessories, and advice
requirements applying in the country of on their use and installation are available
first delivery, also known as homologation. from a MINI dealer's service center.
If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ- MINI parts and accessories were tested by
ent country it might be necessary to adapt the manufacturer of the MINI for their
your vehicle to potentially differing operat- safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.
ing conditions and registration require- The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with genuine MINI parts and accessories.
the homologation requirements in a certain
country you may not be able to lodge war- The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further evaluate whether each individual product
8
Information NOTES
from another manufacturer can be used phthalates, and lead, which are known to
with MINI vehicles without presenting a the State of California to cause cancer and
safety hazard, even if a country-specific of- birth defects or other reproductive harm.
ficial approval was issued. The manufac- To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-
turer of your vehicle does not evaluate haust, do not idle the engine except as
whether these products are suitable for necessary, service your vehicle in a well-
MINI vehicles under all usage conditions. ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing
California Proposition 65 Warning your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
For vehicles sold in California, the law re-
hicle.
quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the
following warning:
Service and warranty
Warning We recommend that you read this publica-
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au- tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by
tomobile components and parts, including the following warranties:
components found in the interior furnish- – New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-
– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and repro- – Federal Emissions System Defect War-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids ranty.
contained in vehicles and certain products – Federal Emissions Performance War-
of component wear contain or emit chemi- ranty.
cals known to the State of California to – California Emission Control System Lim-
cause cancer and birth defects or other re- ited Warranty.
productive harm. Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and Detailed information about these warranties
lead compounds. Batteries also contain is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-
other chemicals known to the State of Cali- mation Booklet for US models or in the War-
fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-
after handling. Used engine oil contains dian models.
chemicals that have caused cancer in labo- Your vehicle has been specifically adapted
ratory animals. Always protect your skin and designed to meet the particular operat-
by washing thoroughly with soap and wa- ing conditions and homologation require-
ter. For more information go to ments in your country and continental re-
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- gion in order to deliver the full driving
hicle. pleasure while the vehicle is operated under
those conditions. If you wish to operate
your vehicle in another country or region,
Warning you may be required to adapt your vehicle
to meet different prevailing operating con-
Operating, servicing and maintaining a ditions and homologation requirements.
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor You should also be aware of any applicable
vehicle can expose you to chemicals in- warranty limitations or exclusions for such
cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, country or region. In such case, please con-
9
NOTES Information
tact Customer Relations for further informa- Personal reference

tion.
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi-
cle identification number. Depending on the
Maintenance country, the vehicle owner can be identified
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain with the vehicle identification number, li-
the road safety, operational reliability and cense plate and corresponding authorities.
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. In addition, there are other options to track
Specifications for maintenance measures: data collected in the vehicle to the driver or
vehicle owner, for instance via utilized
– MINI Maintenance system. services.
– Service and Warranty Information Book-
let for US models. Operating data in the vehicle
– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Control units process data to operate the ve-
Canadian models. hicle.
If the vehicle is not maintained or is im- For example, this includes:
properly maintained, this could result in se-
rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is – Status messages for the vehicle and its
not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim- individual components, e.g., wheel rota-
ited Warranty. tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration, engaged safety belt
Refer to section on engine oil change re- indicator.
garding recommended service intervals for
oil changes. – Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,
rain sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the
Data memory vehicle itself and generally volatile. The
data is not stored beyond the operating pe-
riod.
General information Electronic components, e.g. control units
Electronic control devices are installed in and ignition keys, contain components for
the vehicle. Electronic control units process storing technical information. Information
data they receive from vehicle sensors, self- about the vehicle condition, component us-
generate or exchange with each other. Some age, maintenance recommendations, events
control units are necessary for the vehicle or faults can be stored temporarily or per-
to function safely or provide assistance dur- manently.
ing driving, for instance driver assistance
This information generally records the state
systems. Furthermore, control units facili-
of a component, a module, a system, or the
tate comfort or infotainment functions.
environment, for instance:
Information about stored or exchanged data
– Operating states of system components,
can be requested from the manufacturer of
for instance, fill levels, tire inflation
the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam-
pressure, battery status.
ple.
– Malfunctions and faults in important
system components, for instance lights
and brakes.
10
Information NOTES
– Responses by the vehicle to special sit- the vehicle and modified or reset at any
uations such as airbag deployment or time.
engagement of the driving stability con- For example, this includes:
trol systems.
– Settings for the seat and steering wheel
– Information on vehicle-damaging positions.
events.
– Chassis and climate control settings.
The data is required to perform the control
If necessary, data can be transferred to the
unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves
entertainment and communication system
to recognize and correct malfunctions, and
of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize
vehicle functions. This includes the following depending on
the respective equipment:
The majority of this data is stored tempora-
rily and is only processed within the vehicle – Multimedia data such as music, films or
itself. In some circumstances the vehicle photos for playback in an integrated
may store some data for an additional but multimedia system.
limited period of time. – Address book data for use in conjunc-
When servicing, for instance during repairs, tion with an integrated hands-free sys-
service processes, warranty cases, and qual- tem or an integrated navigation system.
ity assurance measures, this technical infor- – Entered navigation destinations.
mation can be read out from the vehicle to- – Data on the use of Internet services.
gether with the vehicle identification
number. This data can be stored locally in the vehicle
or is found on a device that has been con-
A dealer’s service center or another quali- nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,
fied service center or repair shop can read USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is
out the information. The socket for OBD On- stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at
board Diagnosis required by law in the ve- any time.
hicle is used to read out the data.
This data is only transmitted to third parties
The data is collected, processed, and used upon personal request as part of the use of
by the relevant organizations in the service online services. The transmission depends
network. The data documents technical con- on the selected settings for the use of the
ditions of the vehicle, which can be used to services.
determine vehicle maintenance status, and
facilitate quality improvement. Incorporation of mobile devices
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo-
be reset when a dealer’s service center or bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-
another qualified service center or repair stance smartphones, can be controlled via
shop performs repair or servicing work. the vehicle control elements.
Data entry and data transfer into The sound and picture from the mobile de-
vice can be played back and displayed
the vehicle through the multimedia system. Certain in-
formation is transferred to the mobile de-
General information vice at the same time. Depending on the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, com- type of incorporation, this includes, for in-
fort and individual settings can be stored in stance position data and other general vehi-
11
NOTES Information
cle information. This optimizes the way in on a legal permission, contractual arrange-
which selected apps, for instance navigation ment or consent. It is also possible to acti-
or music playback, work. vate or deactivate the data connection as a
There is no further interaction between the whole. That is, with the exception of func-
mobile device and the vehicle, such as actions and services required by law such as
tive access to vehicle data. Assist systems.
How the data will be processed further is
determined by the provider of the particular
Services from other providers
app being used. The extent of the possible When using online services from other pro-
settings depends on the respective app and viders, these services are the responsibility
the operating system of the mobile device. of the relevant provider and subject to their
data privacy conditions and terms of use.
Services The vehicle manufacturer has no influence
on the content exchanged during this proc-
General information ess. Information on the way in which per-
sonal data is collected and used in relation
If the vehicle has a wireless network con- to services from third parties, the scope of
nection, this enables data to be exchanged such data, and its purpose, can be obtained
between the vehicle and other systems. The from the relevant service provider.
wireless network connection is realized via
an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit
or via personal mobile devices brought into
the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This
Event Data Recorder EDR
wireless network connection enables 'online
functions' to be used. These include online This vehicle is equipped with an event data
services and apps supplied by the vehicle recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR
manufacturer or by other providers. is to record, in certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
Services from the vehicle ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
manufacturer will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to
Where online services from the vehicle record data related to vehicle dynamics and
manufacturer are concerned, the corre- safety systems for a short period of time,
sponding functions are described in the ap- typically 30 seconds or less.
propriate place, for instance the Owner's
Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
vant legal information pertaining to data cord such data as:
protection may also be found on the manu- – How various systems in your vehicle
facturer’s website. Personal data may be were operating.
used to perform online services. Data is ex- – Whether or not the driver and passen-
changed over a secure connection, for in- ger safety belts were fastened.
stance with the IT systems of the vehicle – How far, if at all, the driver was depress-
manufacturer intended for this purpose. ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
Any collection, processing, and use of per- – How fast the vehicle was traveling.
sonal data above and beyond that needed to
provide the services must always be based
12
Information NOTES
This data can help provide a better under- Engine compartment

standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
ing conditions and no personal data, for in-
stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely The engraved vehicle identification number
acquired during a crash investigation. can be found in the engine compartment, on
the right-hand side of the vehicle.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the ve-
hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to Right nameplate
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, For 3-door models:
such as law enforcement, that have the spe-
cial equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification number

General information
Depending on the national-market version,
the vehicle identification number is located The vehicle identification number can be
in different positions in the vehicle. This found on the nameplate, on the right-hand
chapter describes all possible positions for side of the vehicle.
the series.
For 5-door models:
The vehicle identification number can be

found on the nameplate, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
13
NOTES Information
Left nameplate Reporting safety defects

For 3-door models:
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles
owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti-
fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box
The vehicle identification number can be 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,
found on the nameplate, on the left-hand Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
side of the vehicle. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
For 5-door models:
that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
The vehicle identification number can be tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
found on the nameplate, on the left-hand Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
side of the vehicle. other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov
Windshield
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You
can also obtain other information about mo-
tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
The vehicle identification number can also

be found behind the windshield.
14
Information NOTES
15
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing Buttons for the central locking
system
Buttons on the vehicle key
Overview
1 Unlocking
Buttons for the central locking system.
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
Locking
4 Panic mode
Pressing the button locks the vehi-
cle if the front doors are closed.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key. Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the ve-
Depending on the settings, either only the hicle.
driver's door or all vehicle access points are
unlocked.
Panic mode
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press
the button on the vehicle key again to un- You can trigger the alarm system if you find
lock the other vehicle access points. yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the vehicle key
Press and hold the button on the ve-
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
hicle key after unlocking.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle Comfort Access
key is pressed.
Concept
Locking the vehicle The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
Press the button on the vehicle key. ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
All vehicle access points are locked. your pants pocket, is sufficient.
16
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- – Unlock the vehicle and then press the
cle key when it is in close proximity or in button on the outside of the tailgate.
the car's interior. – Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Unlocking the vehicle
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked.
Closing
Closing the tailgate manually.
Displays and control elements
On the driver's or front passenger's door In the vicinity of the steering

handle, press the button. wheel
Locking the vehicle
1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-
On the driver's or front passenger's door nal
handle, press the button. 3 Instrument cluster
4 Wiper system
Tailgate
Indicator/warning lights
Unlocking The indicator/warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
drive-ready state is established.
17
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Driver's door Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main
menu.
Press twice: displays all menu
items of the main menu.
Goes to the Communication
menu.
1 Power windows Goes to the Media/Radio menu.
2 Exterior mirrors
Goes to destination input menu
for navigation.
All around the selector lever
Goes to navigation map.
Press once: opens the previous

display.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Goes to the Options menu.
1 Selector lever Voice control

2 Controller with buttons
3 Parking brake Activating the voice control system
Press the button on the steering
Central Information Display (CID) wheel.
Wait for the signal.
Concept
Say the command.
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of This icon indicates that the voice con-
switches. These functions can be operated trol system is active.
via the Controller. If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the Central Information
Display (CID).
Terminating the voice control system

wheel or ›Cancel‹.
18
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering Adjusting the exterior mirrors
wheel
Manually adjustable seats
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
1 Forward/backward 3 Folding in and out
2 Thigh support
3 Height Adjusting the steering wheel
4 Backrest tilt In four directions
Adjusting the head restraint

Height
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat
position.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
3. Fold the lever back up.
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Entering the rear Button Function

1. Pull lever up to the stop. Programmable memory buttons.
Changing the waveband/satellite

radio.
Navigation destination input

Entering a destination via address
State/province
2. Fold backrest forward.
1. "Navigation"
3. Push the seat forward.
2. "Enter address"
Original position 3. "State/Province?"
1. Push the seat back into the original po- 4. Select the country from the list.
sition.
Entering the address
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/
Infotainment city
1. "City/Postal code?"
Radio 2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with
Buttons and functions each entry.
Depending on the country and equipment
3. Select the icon.
version, the radio has the following buttons.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
Button Function
5. If necessary, enter the street.
Press: switches sound output on/
6. Select the street as you would the town/
off.
city.
Turn: adjusts the volume.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
Change the entertainment 8. Select the icon.
source.
9. Select a house number or range of house
Press once: changes the station/ numbers from the list.
track.
Press and hold: fast forward/ Starting destination guidance
rewind the track. "Start guidance"
Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered.
20
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Pairing the mobile phone Using the telephone

After the mobile phone is paired once with
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper- Accepting a call
ated using the Central Information Display Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen-
(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo- tral Information Display (CID) or the button
ken instructions. on the steering wheel.
1. "My MINI"
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
2. "System settings" "Accept"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device" Via the button on the steering wheel
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- Press the button.
played on the Control Display.
Via the instrument cluster
5. Select the functions for which the mo-
bile phone is to be used. Use the OK button on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept"
6. To perform additional steps on the mo-
bile phone, refer to the operating in- Dialing a number
structions for the mobile phone: for in-
stance search for or connect the 1. "Communication"
Bluetooth device or a new device. 2. "Dial number"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- 3. Select the numbers individually.
pears on the mobile phone display. Se-
4. Select the icon.
lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
Establish the connection via the additional
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
telephone:
trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
1. Press the button.
– Compare the control number dis-
played on the Control Display with 2. "Call via"
the control number on the display of
the device. Confirm the control num- Apple CarPlay preparation
ber on the device and on the Control
Display. Concept
– Enter and confirm the same control CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
number on the device and via the patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
Central Information Display (CID). voice operation and the Central Information
The device is connected and displayed Display (CID).
in the device list.
The mobile phone is connected and will ap- Functional requirements
pear at the top of the list of mobile phones. – Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later
with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile contract.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-

tion are activated on the iPhone.
– If necessary, the setting for mobile data
must be activated on the iPhone.
– WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the
vehicle.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
22
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
On the road
Driving Display in the instrument cluster
The READY display indicates
Drive-ready state that the vehicle is ready for
driving.
General information
When drive-ready state is switched on, the Drive-ready state in detail
vehicle is operational.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Requirements
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the Driving is possible under the following con-
instrument cluster light up for a varied ditions:
length of time. – The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
Activated drive-ready state is the equiva- charged.
lent of a running engine in conventional ve- – The driver's door is closed.
hicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is
equivalent to switching the engine off. – Charging cable is detached.
To save battery power when parking, switch Driving
off drive-ready state and any unnecessary
electrical consumers: 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
The drive-ready state is switched off auto- 2. Apply the brake and engage the selector
matically if the driver's safety belt is not lever in position D or R.
buckled when the driver's door is opened. 3. Release the parking brake.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button Accelerator pedal positions
switches standby state on or
off.
Drive-ready state is switched
on when you depress the
brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop
button.
Switching on drive-ready state

1. Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal. 1 Deceleration
3. Press the Start/Stop button. 2 Coasting
Drive-ready state is switched on. 3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePO-
WER
23
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
Engaging the gear Parking brake

– Interlock: the selector lever position P
can be exited only with drive-ready Set the electrical parking brake
state engaged. Pull the switch when the vehicle is
– Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary, stationary.
press on the brake pedal before shifting The LED and indicator light light up.
out of P or N; otherwise, the shift com-
mand will not be executed. Releasing
– Shift lock: before shifting out of P, re- Press the switch while stepping on the
move the charging cable from the vehi- brake pedal or selector lever position P
cle; otherwise, the shift command will is set.
not be executed.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Engaging N, D, R The parking brake is released.
Turn signal, high beams, headlight

flasher, roadside parking lights
Turn signal
Move the selector lever in the desired direc-

tion.
Engaging P
– On: press the lever past the resistance

point.
– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-
ance point.
– Off: press the lever past the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap
the lever up or down.
Apply brake and press button P. – Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-
sistance point and hold it there for as
long as you want the turn signal to flash.
24
High beams, headlight flasher Lights and lighting

Light functions
Icon Function
Bad weather light.
Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
Lights off.
– High beams on, arrow 1.
Daytime running lights.
The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on. Parking lights.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
Low beams.
Canada: roadside parking light
Instrument lighting.
Wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
To illuminate the vehicle on one side. Switching on

– On: with the standby state switched off,
press the lever either up or down past
the resistance point for approx. 2 sec-
onds.
– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-
ance point in the opposite direction.
Press the lever up until the desired position

is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers: posi-
tion 0.
25
– Rain sensor: position 1. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

– Normal wiper speed: position 2. sensor
– Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Switching off and brief wipe
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield

Press the lever down.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating Pull the lever.
Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

ance point.
26
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap sensor
once beyond the resistance point.
Switching off and brief wipe
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield

– To switch off fast wipe: press down
twice.
– To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
Rain sensor
Pull the lever.
Activating/deactivating
Climate control
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
27
Button Function Connecting the charging cable

AUTO program. To connect, engage selector lever posi-
tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-
lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if
Air recirculation mode. needed.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
Controls the air flow, The charging socket flap opens.
manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrosts and defogs the

windows.
Rear window defroster.
2. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.
Charging the vehicle

Charging socket flap
3. Remove the cover of the charging cable

connector, if needed.
4. Connect the Mode 2 charging cable to
the household socket or the Mode 3
charging cable to the port at the AC
charging station as needed.
5. Insert the appropriate charging cable
The charging socket flap is located on the connector, and push it in until it en-
right side of the vehicle. gages.
Always keep charging socket clean and un- When charging at a charging station, follow
obstructed. the instructions at the charging station.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when
the charging socket is not used. Removing
AC charging: when the charging process is
active and the vehicle is locked, the charg-
28
ing cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle be- Wheels and tires
fore removing the cable.
Direct current charging: during the charg- Tire inflation pressure specifications
ing process, the charging cable is locked.
When the charging process is completed,
the charging cable is automatically un-
locked.
If necessary, clean the area between the
charging socket flap and charging socket,
for instance from snow, before removing it.
1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key
if it is locked.
Charging cable is unlocked. The tire inflation pressure values can be
found on the sign on the door pillar.
2. Press the release button on the handle,
arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at
the gripping areas. Checking the tire inflation pressure
Charging process is interrupted. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed:
– At least twice a month.
– Before embarking on an extended trip.
After correcting the tire inflation

pressure
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
3. Remove the charging cable from the
charging socket, arrow 2.
Providing assistance
4. Put the charging socket lid back on.
5. Press on the charging socket flap until it Hazard warning flashers
engages.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable con-
nector, if needed.
7. Disconnect the Mode 2 charging cable
from the household socket or the Mode
3 charging cable from the port at the AC
8. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the perma-
nently installed charging cable in the The button is located above the Control Dis-
place provided for it. play.
29
Breakdown assistance
MINI Roadside Assistance
This service can be reached around the
clock in many countries.
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-
tance is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
30
31
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
This chapter describes all standard, country- When using these functions and systems,
specific and optional features offered with the applicable laws and regulations must be
the series. It also describes features and observed.
functions that are not necessarily available
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 83 Lights off

2 Exterior mirror operation 94 Daytime running lights 140
3 Buttons of the central locking sys- Parking lights 138
tem 74
4 Lights
Low beams 138
Bad weather light 141
Light switch 138
32
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Automatic headlight con- Roadside parking lights 139

trol 139
Cornering light 140
Trip computer 131
High-beam Assistant 140
Instrument lighting 142
7 Instrument cluster 120
8 Steering column stalk, right
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Wipers 111
Camera-based cruise control
Wiper on Canadian mod-
on/off 173
els 115
Cruise control on/off 179 Rain sensor 112
Rain sensor on Canadian mod-
els 116
Speed Limiter 164
Cleaning windows 113
Pausing, continuing cruise

control Rear window wiper in Cana-
dian models 114
Cruise control: increase speed
Rear window wiper 114
Cruise control: reduce speed

Clean the rear window 114
Camera-based cruise control:

reduce distance 9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Camera-based cruise control: Voice control 44
increase distance
Telephone
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 111
Confirm the selection 131
High beams, head-

light flasher 111 Move selection up 131
High-beam Assistant 140

Move selection down 131
33
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Increase volume 11 Heated steering wheel 96

12 Adjusting the steering wheel 96
Reduce volume 13 Unlocking the hood 256
14 Depending on the equipment: using tail-
gate 76
10 Horn, entire surface
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 267 6 PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 181
Rearview camera 184
Intelligent Safety 155
Parking assistant 187
Energy recovery 106
2 Control Display 36
3 Radio/Multimedia
Switch drive-ready state on
4 Glove compartment 210 and off 102
5 Climate control 192
34
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 7 Selector lever 104

168 8 Controller with buttons 39
MINI Driving Modes 9 Parking brake, electric 109
switch 170
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Call, SOS 268 4 Ambient light 142
2 Indicator light, front-seat pas- 5 Panoramic glass sunroof 84

senger airbag 147
3 Reading lights 142 6 Interior lights 142
35
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options Input and display
This chapter describes all standard, country- Main menu
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and General information
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- The main menu is divided into two areas.
tions or country versions. This also applies The left area contains menu items that can
to safety-related functions and systems. be used to call up all functions from the on-
When using these functions and systems, board monitor. The menu items in the right
the applicable laws and regulations must be area show dynamic contents that enable
quick access to certain functions.
observed.
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller.
Safety information Media/Radio

All functions for the entertainment system,
for instance radio stations or pairing with
external devices.
Warning
Operating the integrated information sys- Communication
tems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- Telephone and message function, e-mail and
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is calendar and also pairing and managing mo-
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or bile devices, for instance smartphones.
devices when the traffic situation allows.
As warranted, stop and use the systems Navigation
and devices while the vehicle is stationary. Access to the navigation system, destina-
tion input and traffic bulletins. Configurable
map views and other functions, such as
Points of Interest.
36
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
My MINI – Destination search: place names can be

Information on the vehicle status and avail- entered in all languages that are availa-
able settings for vehicle and on-board moni- ble on the Control Display.
tor. Access to the Integrated Owner's
Manual. Activating/deactivating the
functions
MINI Connected Several menu items are preceded by a
Access to apps and vehicle functions. Addi- checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether
tional apps and vehicle functions can be the function is activated or deactivated. Se-
purchased from the MINI Connected Store. lecting the menu item activates or deacti-
vates the function.
Messages Function is activated.
Access to all incoming messages in the ve- Function is deactivated.
hicle, for instance Check Control messages.
Status information
Letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be- General information
tween entering upper and lower case let- The status field can be found in the upper
ters, numbers and characters: area of the Control Display. Status informa-
Icon Function tion is displayed in the form of symbols.
Change between capital and Radio

lower-case letters.
Insert blank space. Icon Meaning
Use voice control. HD Radio station is being re-
ceived.
Confirm entry.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Without navigation system
Telephone
Select the icon.
Icon Meaning
Entry comparison
Incoming or outgoing call.
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter Missed call.
entered and letters may be added automati-
cally. Signal strength of cellular network.
Entries are continuously compared with Symbol flashes: network search.
data stored in the vehicle. Cellular network is not available.
– Only those letters are offered during en- Roaming is active.
try for which data is available.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
37
Icon Meaning Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus which
Reminder.
support the split screen function.
Sending not possible.
1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
Entertainment
2. Press the Controller.
Icon Meaning 3. Select the desired setting.
Bluetooth audio. Specifying the number of displays
USB audio interface. It is possible to specify the number of dis-
Mobile phone audio interface. plays.
Apple CarPlay. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the

split screen is selected.
Other symbols 2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
Icon Meaning 4. Select the desired setting.
Check Control message. 5. Tilt the Controller to the left.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Control elements
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle po- Overview
sition.
Checking the current vehicle posi-
tion.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on
the right side of the split screen, for in-
stance information from the trip computer. 1 Control Display with touchscreen
In the divided screen view, the so-called 2 Controller with buttons
split screen, this information remains visi-
ble even when switching to another menu.
Control Display
Switching the split screen on/off
General information
1. Press the button. To clean the Control Display, follow the care
2. "Split screen" instructions, refer to page 277.
38
In the case of very high temperatures on Controller

the Control Display, for instance due to in-
tense solar radiation, the brightness may be General information
reduced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, for in- The buttons can be used to open the menus
stance through shade or air conditioning, directly. The Controller can be used to se-
the normal functions are restored. lect menu items and enter the settings.
Safety information Operation

– Turn to switch between menu items, for
example.
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Con-
trol Display can shift and damage the Con-
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage.
Do not place objects in the area in front of
the Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically

The Control Display is switched on automat- – Press to select a menu item, for example.
ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as
soon as the Control Display is needed for
operation.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if
no operation is performed on the vehicle for
several minutes.
Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off – With navigation system: tilt in four di-
manually. rections to switch between displays, for
example.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the
Controller to switch it back on again.
39
– Without navigation system: tilt in two Operating via the Controller

directions to switch between displays,
for example.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
The main menu is displayed.
Press once: calls up the main All Central Information Display (CID) func-
menu. tions can be called up via the main menu.
Press twice: displays all menu
items of the main menu. Adjusting the main menu
With navigation system: opens
the Communication menu. 1. Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu are
With navigation system: opens displayed.
the Media/Radio menu.
2. Select a menu item.
Without navigation system: open
3. To move the menu item to the desired
the Audio menu.
position, tilt the Controller to the right
Without navigation system: or left.
opens the Telephone menu.
With navigation system: opens Selecting menu items
destination input menu for navi- Highlighted menu items can be selected.
gation.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired
With navigation system: opens menu item is highlighted.
navigation map. 2. Press the Controller.
Press once: opens the previous
display. Adjusting menu contents
Press and hold: open the menus The display of menus "Media/Radio",
used last. "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can
be adjusted, for instance to remove the en-
Goes to the Options menu.
tries of functions that are not used from the
menu.
40
Via the Central Information Display (CID): The "Options" menu is displayed.
1. Select the menu. The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
2. "Personalize menu"
– "Split screen": screen settings.
3. Select desired menu contents to be dis-
– "Media/Radio": control options for the
played.
selected main menu.
Dynamic contents – "Save station": if applicable, further con-
trol options for the selected menu.
You can display dynamic contents within
the menu items. The contents of the menu Entering letters and numbers
items update automatically, e.g., the active
destination guidance in the navigation.
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or
1. "My MINI" numbers.
2. "Contents of main menu" 2. : confirm entry.
Changing between displays Deleting

After a menu item is selected, for instance
"System settings", a new display appears. Icon Function
– Tilt the Controller to the left. Press the Controller: delete
The current display closes and the previ- letters or number.
ous display is shown. or Hold the Controller down: de-
lete all letters or numbers.
– Press the button.
The previous display re-opens. Using alphabetical lists
– Tilt the Controller to the right. For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
The new display opens. tries, the letters for which there is an entry
An arrow indicates that additional displays are displayed at the left edge.
can be opened.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
Opening recently used menus
All letters for which there are entries
The recently used menus can be displayed. are displayed on the left edge.
Press and hold this button. 2. Select the first letter of the desired en-
The recently used menus are dis- try.
played. The first entry of the selected letter is
displayed.
Going to the Options menu
Press the button.
41
Operation via touchscreen Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display
General information opens.
The Control Display is equipped with a An arrow indicates that additional displays
touchscreen. can be opened.
Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not – Swipe to the left.
use any objects. – Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the icon. Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Tap the icon on the touchscreen.
A keyboard is displayed on the Control
Display.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting
The main menu is displayed. Icon Function
All Central Information Display (CID) func- Tapping the icon: deletes the letter
tions can be called up via the main menu. or number.
Adjusting the main menu Tapping and holding the icon all
letters: deletes all letters or num-
1. Tap on the icon. bers.
2. Drag the menu item to the desired posi-
tion on the right or left. Operating navigation map
Selecting menu items The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
Tap the desired menu item.
Function Operation
Dynamic contents Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the
You can display dynamic contents within map. fingers.
the menu items. The contents of the menu
items update automatically, e.g., the active
destination guidance in the navigation.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Contents of main menu"
42
Programmable memory but-

tons
General information
The Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be stored on the programmable
memory buttons and called up directly, for
instance radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Storing a function
1. Select the function via the Central Infor-
mation Display (CID).
2. Press and hold the desired but-

ton, until a signal sounds.
Executing a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for instance that the number is
dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed
in the upper area of the Control Display.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously
for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
43
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options activation system. To set the language,
refer to page 48.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Always say commands in the language
specific and optional features offered with of the voice activation system.
the series. It also describes features and
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Using the voice activation sys-
tions or country versions. This also applies tem
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be Activating the voice control system
observed.
wheel.
Concept Wait for the signal.
Say the command.
Most functions displayed on the Control This icon indicates that the voice con-
Display can be operated by voice commands trol system is active.
via the voice activation system. The system No other commands may be available. In
supports you with announcements during this case, operate the function via the Cen-
input. tral Information Display (CID).
Terminating the voice control

General information system
– Functions that can only be used when
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
the vehicle is stationary can only be op-
erated via the voice activation system to
a limited extent.
– The system uses a special microphone Possible commands
on the driver's side.
– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver- General information
bal instructions to use with the voice ac- Most menu items on the Control Display can
tivation system. be spoken as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be
spoken.
Functional requirements
You can also select list entries such as
phone list entries via voice activation. Read
– A language must be set via the Control
Display that is supported by the voice
44
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
these list entries out loud exactly as they Settings

are shown in the respective list.
Displaying possible commands Setting the voice control

The following is displayed in the top area of You can set the system to use standard dia-
the Control Display: log or a short version.
– Some possible commands for the current The short version of the voice control plays
menu. back short messages in abbreviated form.
– Some possible commands from other Via the Central Information Display (CID):
menus. 1. "My MINI"
– Status of the voice recognition. 2. "System settings"
– Encrypted connection is not availa- 3. "Language"
ble.
4. "Speech mode:"
Help on the voice activation system 5. Select the desired setting.
– ›General information on voice control‹:
have information on the operating prin- Activating voice recognition via
ciple of the voice activation system read the server
out loud. The voice recognition feature via the server
– ›Help‹: have help for the current menu provides a dictation function and a natural
read out loud. method of destination input while improv-
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use
the functions, data is transmitted to a serv-
Example: going to the sound ice provider via an encrypted connection
and stored locally there.
settings
The commands of the menu items are spo- 1. "My MINI"
ken just as they are selected via the Con- 2. "System settings"
troller.
3. "Language"
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-
4. "Server speech recognition"
put, if needed.
2. Press the button on the steering Adjusting the volume

wheel. Turn the volume button during the spoken
3. ›Media and radio‹ instructions until the desired volume is set.
4. ›Tone‹ – The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is
changed.
– The volume is stored for the profile cur-
rently used.
45
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Information on Emergency If it was not possible to activate voice com-

mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices
Requests appears on the Control Display.
Do not use the voice activation system to

initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful Voice assistants from third-
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es- party providers
tablishment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to Concept
page 268, close to the interior mirror. Some third-party providers provide digital
voice assistants. Supported voice assistants
can be used in the vehicle.
System limits
General information
– Certain noises can be detected and may Some of the functions are limited in the ve-
lead to problems. Keep the doors, win- hicle to prevent any impairment of safety
dows, and glass sunroof closed. while driving.
– Noises from the front passenger or the
rear seat bench can impair the system. Functional requirements
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle – If applicable, corresponding Connected
while speaking. Service subsequently purchased via
– Major language dialects can cause prob- MINI Connected Store.
lems with the voice recognition feature. – Vehicle added in the MINI app.
Speak loud and clear.
– Third-party provider account and MINI
account connected in the MINI app.
Using the voice activation sys- – Smartphone connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth audio.
tem of the smartphone
Activation in the MINI app
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can Third-party assistants are set up in the
be used via voice control. MINI app.
Activate voice command response on the Follow the instructions in the app.
smartphone for this purpose.
Activation in the vehicle
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. 1. Press the button on the steering
Voice command response is activated on wheel.
the smartphone. 2. Wait for the signal.
2. Release the button. 3. Say the specific activation word of the
third-party provider and the desired
If activation is successful, a confirma- command.
tion appears on the Control Display.
46
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Information about the active function is

displayed on the Control Display.
Malfunction
In case of a malfunction, switch off the
drive-ready state and restart again.
47
AT A GLANCE General settings
General settings
Vehicle features and options The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Setting the time
the series. It also describes features and Via the Central Information Display (CID):
functions that are not necessarily available 1. "My MINI"
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies 2. "System settings"
to safety-related functions and systems. 3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
observed. 5. Turn the Controller until the desired
hours are displayed.
Language 7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
nutes are displayed.
Setting the language 8. Press the Controller.
1. "My MINI"
Setting the time format
3. If necessary, "Language" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Language:" 2. "System settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Date and time"
The setting is stored for the driver profile 4. "Time format:"
currently used. 5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Time
Setting the time zone Date
1. "My MINI"
Setting the date
3. "Date and time" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Time zone:" 2. "System settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Date and time"
48
General settings AT A GLANCE
4. "Date:" Activating/deactivating the

5. Turn the Controller until the desired day display of the current vehicle
is displayed.
position
7. Make the settings for the month and Concept
year.
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the
Setting the date format current vehicle position can be displayed in
the MINI Connected app.
1. "My MINI" Activating/deactivating
2. "System settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
3. "Date and time" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Date format:" 2. "Vehicle settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Data privacy"
The setting is stored for the driver profile 4. "Vehicle tracking"
currently used. 5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the units of measure- Activating/deactivating pop-

ment ups
You can set the units of measurement for For some functions, pop-ups are displayed
some values, for example, consumption, dis- automatically on the Control Display. Some
tances and temperature. of these pop-ups can be activated or deacti-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): vated.
1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
2. "System settings" 1. "My MINI"
3. "Units" 2. "System settings"
4. Select the desired menu item. 3. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting. 4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used. currently used.
Control Display
Brightness
49
1. "My MINI" General information

2. "System settings" The setting of the color world effects the
following display content:
3. "Displays"
– On-board monitor.
4. "Control display"
– Instrument cluster.
5. "Brightness at night"
– Head-up Display.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired Depending on the equipment, the color
brightness is set. world can be applied as basic display for the
7. Press the Controller. LED ring on the central instrument.
The setting is stored for the driver profile LED ring on the central instrument cluster,
currently used. refer to page 134.
Depending on the light conditions, the
brightness settings may not be clearly visi- Setting the color world
ble. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Screensaver 1. "My MINI"

If no entries are made via the Central Infor- 2. "System settings"
mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be 3. "Displays"
displayed after an adjustable time. 4. "Color scheme"
5. Select the desired setting.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
Messages
4. "Control display"
Concept
5. "Screensaver"
The menu centrally displays all messages ar-
6. Select the desired setting. riving in the vehicle in list form.
currently used. General information
The following messages can be displayed:
– Traffic messages.
Color world
– Communication messages, for example
e-mails, SMS text messages or remind-
Concept ers.
The display of the display content can be – Check Control messages.
configured individually, for instance in a – Messages on service notifications.
harmonic color style.
– Messages from the vehicle manufac-
turer.
Messages are additionally displayed in the
status field.
50
Retrieving messages Data protection

1. "Notifications" Data transfer
2. Select the desired notification.
Concept
The menu in which the notification is dis- The vehicle offers various functions which
played will open. require data to be transferred to MINI or a
service provider. The data transfer can be
Deleting messages deactivated for some functions.
All messages, except Check Control mes-
sages or messages from the vehicle manu- General information
facturer, can be deleted from the list. With data transfer deactivated, the respec-
Check Control messages or messages from tive function cannot be used.
the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as Only make these settings while stationary.
long as they are relevant.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Activating/deactivating
1. "Notifications" Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
2. Select the desired message.
3. Press the button. 1. "My MINI"
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all 2. "System settings"
notifications"
3. "Data privacy"
Settings 4. Select the desired setting.
The following settings can be adjusted:
– Select the applications, from which mes- Deleting personal data in the
sages will be permitted. vehicle
– Sort the messages according to date or
priority. Concept
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
1. "My MINI" This personal data can be permanently de-
2. "System settings" leted via the Central Information Display
(CID).
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting. General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
following data is deleted:
– Driver profile settings.
– Stored radio stations.
– Stored programmable memory buttons.
51
– Travel and trip computer information. connection type to select depends on the
– Music collection. mobile device and the desired function.
– Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions. General information
– Phone book. The following overview shows possible
functions and the suitable connection types
– Office data, for instance voice memos. for them. The scope of functions depends on
– Login accounts. the mobile device.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take Function Connec-
up to 15 minutes. tion type
Functional requirement Making calls via the hands- Bluetooth.

free system.
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Using phone functions via
Deleting data the Central Information Dis-
play (CID).
Note and follow the instructions on the Con-
trol Display. Using the smartphone Of-
fice functions.
Playing music from the Bluetooth
1. "My MINI" smartphone or the audio or USB.
2. "System settings" player.
3. "Data privacy" Using compatible apps via Bluetooth
4. "Delete personal data" the Central Information Dis- or USB.
play (CID).
5. "Delete personal data"
USB storage device: USB.
6. "OK"
Exporting and importing
7. Exit and lock the vehicle. driver profiles.
The deletion process takes 15 minutes to Update the software.
complete.
Playing music.
If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele-
tion. Playing videos from the USB.
smartphone or the USB de-
Canceling deletion vice.
Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel Using Apple CarPlay apps Bluetooth
deletion of the data. via the Central Information and
Display (CID) and voice op- WLAN.
eration.
Connections
The following connection types require one-
Concept time pairing with the vehicle:
Various connection types are available for – Bluetooth.
using mobile devices in the vehicle. The – Apple CarPlay.
52
Paired devices are automatically recognized Bluetooth connection

later on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information – Compatible device, refer to page 53,
with Bluetooth interface.
Warning – The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
Operating the integrated information sys- – The device is ready for operation.
tems and communication devices while – Bluetooth is activated on the device and
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- in the vehicle, refer to page 53.
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or – Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,
devices when the traffic situation allows. may be required on the device; refer to
As warranted, stop and use the systems the owner's manual of the device.
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Switching on Bluetooth
Compatible devices
1. "My MINI"
General information 2. "System settings"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not 3. "Mobile devices"
listed or deviating software versions. 4. "Settings"
Displaying the vehicle identification 5. "Bluetooth®"
number and software part number
Activating/deactivating telephone
When looking for compatible devices, you
functions
may have to state the vehicle identification
number and the software part number. To use all supported functions of a mobile
These numbers can be displayed in the ve- phone, the following functions must be acti-
hicle. vated prior to pairing.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings" 2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings" 4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info" 5. Select the desired setting:
6. "System information" – "Office"
A software update, refer to page 58, can Activate function to transmit short
be performed. messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
memos, and reminders to the vehi-
cle. Costs can be incurred by trans-
mitting all data to the vehicle.
– "Contact images"
53
Activate function to show the con- Frequently Asked Questions

tact pictures. All requirements are met and all required
steps were completed in the specified order.
Pairing the mobile device with the Despite that, the mobile device does not
vehicle function as expected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): In this case, the following explanations can
1. "My MINI" help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired
or connected?
3. "Mobile devices" – There are too many Bluetooth devices
4. "Connect new device" connected to the mobile phone or vehi-
5. Select the functions for which the de- cle.
vice will be used: Delete Bluetooth connections with other
– "Telephone" devices.
– "Bluetooth® audio" Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
– "Apps" and start a new device search.
– "Apple CarPlay" – The mobile phone is in power-save mode
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- or has only a limited remaining battery
played on the Control Display. life.
6. On the mobile device, search for Blue- Charge the mobile phone.
tooth devices in the vicinity. Why does the mobile phone no longer re-
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- act?
pears on the mobile device display. – The applications on the mobile phone do
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi- not function anymore.
cle. Switch the mobile phone off and on
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- again.
trol number is displayed or the control – Possibly too high or too low ambient
number must be entered. temperatures for mobile phone opera-
– Compare the control number dis- tion.
played on the Control Display with Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
the control number on the display of treme ambient temperatures.
the device.
Why can phone functions not be used via
Confirm the control number on the the Central Information Display (CID)?
device and on the Control Display.
– The mobile phone may not be properly
– Enter and confirm the same control configured, for instance as Bluetooth au-
number on the device and via the dio device.
Central Information Display (CID).
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-
The device is connected and displayed phone or additional phone function.
in the device list.
Why are no or not all telephone book en-
If connection was not successful: Fre- tries displayed or why are they incomplete?
quently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.
54
– Transmission of the telephone book en- The snap-in adapter features a separate
tries is not yet complete. USB port that is automatically connected
– It is possible that only the telephone when a compatible mobile phone is in-
book entries of the mobile phone or the serted.
SIM card are transmitted. – Audio devices with USB port, for in-
– It may not be possible to display tele- stance MP3 players.
phone book entries with special charac- – USB storage devices.
ters. Common file systems are supported.
– It may not be possible to transmit con- FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
tacts from social networks. formats.
– The number of phone book entries to be A connected USB device will be supplied
stored is too high. with charge current via the USB port if the
– Data volume of the contact too large, for device supports this. Follow the maximum
instance due to stored information such charge current of the USB port.
as memos. The following uses are possible on USB
Reduce the data volume of the contact. ports with data transfer:
– A mobile phone is only connected as an – Exporting and importing driver profiles,
audio source. refer to page 77.
Reconfigure the mobile phone and con- – Playing music files via USB audio.
nect it with the telephone or additional – Playing videos via USB video.
phone function. – Loading of software updates, refer to
How can the telephone connection quality page 58.
be improved? Follow the following when connecting:
– The strength of the Bluetooth signal on – Do not use force when plugging the con-
the mobile phone can be adjusted, de- nector into the USB port.
pending on the mobile phone.
– Use a flexible adapter cable.
– Insert the mobile phone into the wire-
– Protect the USB device against mechani-
less charging tray.
cal damage.
– Adjust the volume of the microphone
– Due to the large number of USB devices
and loudspeakers separately.
available on the market, it cannot be
If all points in this list have been checked guaranteed that every device is operable
and the required function is still not availa- on the vehicle.
ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service
– Do not expose USB devices to extreme
center or another qualified service center or
environmental conditions, such as very
repair shop.
high temperatures; refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
USB connection
– Due to the many different compression
General information techniques, proper playback of the me-
dia stored on the USB device cannot be
The following mobile devices can be con- guaranteed in all cases.
nected to the USB port:
– To ensure proper transmission of the
– Mobile phones. stored data, do not charge a USB device
55
via the onboard socket, when it is con- – If necessary, the setting for mobile data
nected to the USB port. must be activated on the iPhone.
– Depending on how the USB device is be-
ing used, settings may be required on Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
the USB storage device, refer to the Via the Central Information Display (CID):
owner's manual of the device.
1. "My MINI"
Not compatible USB devices:
– USB hard drives.
– USB hubs. 3. "Mobile devices"
– USB memory card readers with multiple 4. "Settings"
slots. 5. Select the following settings:
– HFS-formatted USB devices. – "Bluetooth®"
– Devices such as fans or lamps. – "Apple CarPlay"
Functional requirement Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Compatible device, refer to page 53, with Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to
USB port. page 54, via Bluetooth
Select CarPlay as the function:
Connecting the device
"Apple CarPlay"
Connect the USB device using a suitable
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
adapter cable to a USB port, refer to
displayed in the device list, refer to
page 206.
page 57.
The USB device is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list. Operation
For more information, refer to the
Apple CarPlay preparation Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
Concept munication.
CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri Frequently Asked Questions
voice operation and the Central Information All requirements are met and all required
Display (CID). steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
Functional requirements function as expected.
– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53. In this case, the following explanations can
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. help:
– Corresponding mobile contract. The iPhone has already been paired with
– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera- Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is
tion are activated on the iPhone. established, CarPlay can no longer be se-
lected.
– Booking the MINI Connected service:
Apple CarPlay preparation.
56
– Delete the iPhone concerned from the Icon Function

device list.
"Apps"
– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-
cerned from the list of stored vehicles "Apple CarPlay"
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
– Pair the iPhone as a new device. Configuring the device
If the steps listed have been carried out and Functions can be activated or deactivated
the required function is still not available: for paired and connected devices.
contact the hotline, a dealer's service center Via the Central Information Display (CID):
or another qualified service center or repair
shop. 1. "My MINI"
Managing mobile devices
3. "Mobile devices"
General information 4. Select the desired device.
– After one-time pairing, the devices are 5. Select the desired setting.
automatically recognized and recon- If a function is assigned to a device, the
nected when standby state is switched function will be deactivated where appro-
on. priate for a device that is already connected
– The data stored on the SIM card or in and the device will be disconnected.
the mobile phone is transferred to the
vehicle after recognition. Disconnecting the device
– For some devices, certain settings may The device's connection to the vehicle is
be necessary, for instance authorization, disconnected.
see owner's manual of the device. The device remains paired and can be con-
nected again, refer to page 57.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired and/or connected with
the vehicle are displayed in the device list. 1. "My MINI"
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "System settings"
1. "My MINI" 3. "Mobile devices"
2. "System settings" 4. Select device.
3. "Mobile devices" 5. "Disconnect device"
A icon indicates, for which function a de-
Connecting the device
vice is used.
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Icon Function
"Telephone"
1. "My MINI"
"Additional telephone" 2. "System settings"
"Bluetooth® audio" 3. "Mobile devices"
57
4. Select device. Contact a dealer's service center or another

5. "Connect device" qualified service center or repair shop for
information on available software updates.
The functions that were assigned to the de-
vice before disconnecting are assigned to Displaying the version of the installed
the device when it is reconnected. The func- software
tions may be deactivated on a device al-
ready connected. The software version installed in the vehicle
is displayed.
Deleting the device Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI"
1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings"
2. "System settings" 3. "Software update"
3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Show current version"
4. Select device. If an update has been carried out before, se-
5. "Delete device" lect the desired version to display additional
information.
The device is disconnected and removed
from the device list. Updating software via USB
Swapping the telephone and additional The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
telephone
If two mobile phones are connected to the
vehicle, the functions of the telephone and 1. Store the file for the software update in
additional telephone can be switched. the main folder of a USB device.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. Connecting USB device to the USB port.
3. "Mobile devices" 5. "Software update"
4. "Settings" 6. "Update software"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
Software update 9. "OK"
General information 10. Wait for the update to complete.
The vehicle supports a large number of mo- 11. Confirm system restart.
bile devices, for example mobile phones and
MP3 players. Software updates are available Restoring the software version
for many of the supported devices. The ve- You can restore the software to the version
hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle prior to the last update or to its factory set-
software updates. tings.
58
The software may only be restored when

the vehicle is stationary.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5. – "Previous version"
The previous software version is re-
stored.
– "Default software settings"
The first software version is re-
stored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
59
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's
This chapter describes all standard, country- Manuals, which are included in addition to
specific and optional features offered with the onboard literature.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Integrated Owner's Manual in
tions or country versions. This also applies the vehicle
the applicable laws and regulations must be Concept
observed. The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
General information can be displayed on the Control Display.
You can use the following media formats to Selecting the Owner's Manual
call up the content in the Owner's Manual:
– Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
page 60. 2. "My MINI"
– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- 3. "Owner's Manual"
cle, refer to page 60. 4. Select the desired method of accessing
the contents.
Printed Owner's Manual Scrolling through the Owner's

Manual
Concept Turn the Controller, until the next or previ-
The printed Owner's Manual describes all ous contents are displayed.
standard, country-specific, and optional fea-
tures offered with the series. Context help
General information General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- The section of the Owner's Manual relating
tainment, and Communication can be ob- to the function that is currently selected
tained as a printed book from the service can be displayed directly.
center.
60
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Opening via Central Information

Display (CID)
Change directly to the Options menu from
the function on the Control Display:

2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance
radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control
Display and to alternate between the two
displays:

2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to

the last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the

page of the Owner's Manual displayed
last.
To alternate continuously between the last
displayed function and the last displayed
page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4
& 5. Opens a new display every time.
61
AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE
MINI eDRIVE
Vehicle features and options – On the go, the energy recovery ensures
that only little energy is lost when brak-
ing.
specific and optional features offered with – When the vehicle decelerates, the elec-
the series. It also describes features and tric motor acts as a generator and con-
functions that are not necessarily available verts the kinetic energy released into
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- electric current.
tions or country versions. This also applies – This partially recharges the high-voltage
to safety-related functions and systems. battery to increase the range.
observed. Overview
Concept
This MINI is an electric vehicle. The vehicle
features a high-voltage system that consists
of an electric motor and a high-voltage bat-
tery among other things.
General information 1 Drive unit

2 Vehicle battery
The eDRIVE system exhibits the following 3 High-voltage cables
special features:
4 Charging socket
– The vehicle is operated emissions free
using its electrical drive system. 5 High-voltage battery
– The special high-voltage battery sup-
plies the electric motor as well as the
comfort features with power. Functions
– The high-voltage battery is charged via
a charging cable, for instance when Electric driving: eDRIVE
parked or while driving utilizing energy
recovery. The vehicle is powered exclusively by the
electric motor. The accelerator pedal can be
– The vehicle can be charged very rapidly used not just for acceleration, but also for
at special charging stations. Charging is deceleration. When the vehicle decelerates,
also possible at household power sock- the electric motor acts as a generator and
ets. charges the high-voltage battery. With a
sensible driving style, this function can be
62
MINI eDRIVE AT A GLANCE
used for especially efficient energy recov- of the drive and visualize the system's use
ery and comfortable driving, using just the in a diagram.
accelerator pedal.
Acoustic pedestrian protection Energy-saving driving and

The system generates a continuous driving maximizing the range
noise during electric driving at low speeds.
Energy-saving driving is the basic prerequi-
Coasting site for as large a range as possible. eDRIVE
An especially efficient operating point is so- provides various functions that assist with
called coasting. In this case, the vehicle is an energy-saving driving style and help to
decelerated only by driving resistance and monitor the range, and if needed, to in-
no energy flows between high-voltage bat- crease it. The following descriptions provide
tery and electric motor. In order to coast, an overview of the available functions and
depress the accelerator pedal far enough so the personal measures.
that the pointer in the performance display,
refer to page 122, is between the areas for Before driving
ePOWER and CHARGE. eDRIVE allows use of the air conditioner
even before driving off. The stationary cli-
Energy recovery: CHARGE mate control, refer to page 196, provides
The high-voltage battery is charged while more range than using full air conditioning
driving through energy recovery. while driving.
The electric motor acts as a generator and Parked vehicle ventilation during the charg-
converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle ing process can provide maximum range
into electrical energy. when driving off.
Charging can take place in various situa-
tions while the vehicle is in motion: Trip planning and special functions
– As soon as the accelerator pedal is only of the navigation system
slightly depressed. Several special functions of the navigation
– As soon as the accelerator pedal is not system support trip planning taking into ac-
depressed. count the electric range:
The pointer in the instrument cluster is lo- – Range assistant, refer to Integrated
cated in the CHARGE area. Owner's Manual, checks whether an en-
tered navigation destination can be
Sensible driving and early speed reduction
reached. If the range is not sufficient,
are important to make full use of the energy
various recommendations to help in-
recovery feature.
crease the range are displayed automati-
cally, for instance, a consumption opti-
mized route based on driving in GREEN
Display Mode is displayed.
– Range map indicates the action range
The eDRIVE displays, refer to page 122, on the navigation map, refer to
provide information about the current state Integrated Owner's Manual.
63
AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE
– Charging assistant under points of inter- Operating noises

est in navigation, helps to find and pos-
sibly include a public charging station in
the desired route, refer to Integrated Operating noises may occur due to the elec-
Owner's Manual. trical system. For instance, these operating
noises may occur in the following situa-
tions:
During driving
– When cooling the high-voltage battery
– General driving tips, refer to page 224, during the charging process.
for increasing the range.
– When cooling the high-voltage battery
– Use the eDRIVE system efficiently, refer with the drive-ready state switched on.
to page 225, for an optimized driving
style. – When climatizing the car's interior.
– MINIMALISM Analyzer, refer to
page 228, to analyze the driving style.
High-voltage battery, long sta-
– GREEN and GREEN +, refer to
page 226, drive mode for increasing the tionary periods
range.
– Information about auxiliary users and Observe the information on vehicle storage
the range potential, refer to page 123. and for longer idle periods, refer to
page 277.
After the trip
– Charge vehicle, refer to page 230, and
plan next trip.
– Prepare for long downtimes, refer to
page 277.
MINI app
The MINI app provides mobility-based serv-
ices and applications.
Safety of the high-voltage sys-

tem
Follow the information on safety, refer to
page 65.
64
Safety of the high-voltage system AT A GLANCE
Safety of the high-voltage system

Vehicle features and options Contact with water
This chapter describes all standard, country- The high-voltage system is typically safe
specific and optional features offered with even in the following example situations:
the series. It also describes features and – Water in the floor area, for instance af-
functions that are not necessarily available ter a rainstorm when the window was
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- kept open.
– Vehicle is in water but only up to the al-
lowed height.
the applicable laws and regulations must be – Fluid escapes in the cargo area.
observed.
Monitoring of the high-volt-

Working on the vehicle age battery
General information Principle
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- The temperature in the high-voltage battery
mends that no changes be made to the vehi- is monitored.
cle, for instance installation of retrofitting An unusually high temperature in the high-
accessories, that will have an effect on the voltage battery is indicated.
vehicle’s high-voltage system.
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
DANGER
An unusually high temperature of the
Improperly performed work, in particular high-voltage battery can cause a formation
maintenance and repair on the high-volt- of gas and smoke. There is an injury haz-
age system, can lead to electric shock. ard or danger to life. In case of noticeable
There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to unusual odor or smoke formation, refer to
life. the notes for actions in the event of a mes-
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- sage.
mends that the work on the vehicle, in par-
ticular maintenance and repair, be per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or High temperature message
another qualified service center or repair While driving:
shop.
A Check Control message is displayed.
While driving:
65
AT A GLANCE Safety of the high-voltage system
Depending on the national-market version:

the vehicle sounds the horn and, if applica-
ble, the vehicle lighting is blinking.
Actions in the event of a message

While driving:
1. Stop immediately.
2. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
3. Exit the vehicle.
4. Establish and keep a sufficient distance
to the vehicle.
5. Alert emergency personnel.
During and shortly after the charging proc-
ess:
1. If necessary, exit the vehicle.
2. Establish and keep a sufficient distance
to the vehicle.
3. Alert emergency personnel.
Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the high-voltage sys-
tem is switched off automatically to prevent
risk of danger to occupants and other traf-
fic.
Read the information on What to do after
an accident, refer to page 272.
66
Safety of the high-voltage system AT A GLANCE
67
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Safety Instructions
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

specific and optional features offered with The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
the series. It also describes features and Batteries or button cells can be swallowed
functions that are not necessarily available and lead to serious or fatal injuries within
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- two hours, for example, due to internal
tions or country versions. This also applies burns or chemical burns. There is an in-
to safety-related functions and systems. jury hazard or danger to life. Keep the ve-
When using these functions and systems, hicle key and batteries out of reach for
the applicable laws and regulations must be children. Immediately seek medical help if
observed. there is any suspicion that a battery or
button cell has been swallowed or is lo-
cated in any part of the body.
Vehicle key
General information Warning
The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle People or animals in the vehicle can lock
keys with integrated key. the doors from the inside and lock them-
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
tery, refer to page 71. be opened from the outside. There is a risk
of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so
Depending on the equipment and country that the vehicle can be opened from the
version, various settings, refer to page 80, outside.
can be configured for the button functions.
A personal driver profile, refer to page 77,
for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.
Warning
To provide information on maintenance rec-
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
ommendations, the service data is stored in
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
the vehicle key, refer to page 260.
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle stance due to the following actions:
key, take the vehicle key with you when ex-
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
iting the vehicle.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
68
Opening and closing CONTROLS
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do – The interior lights, refer to page 142,
not leave children or animals unattended and the MINI logo projection are
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with switched on, provided that the interior
you when exiting and lock the vehicle. lights were not switched off manually.
– Depending on the settings, the welcome
light and pathway lighting, refer to
Overview page 139, are switched on.
– The alarm system, refer to page 81, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Convenient opening
hicle key after unlocking.
1 Unlocking The windows and the glass sunroof are
2 Locking opened, as long as the button on the vehicle
3 Unlocking the tailgate key is pressed.
4 Panic mode Locking

1. Close the driver's door.
Unlocking
2. Press the button on the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
key.
The following functions are executed:
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 80, the following access points are – All doors and the tailgate are locked.
unlocked. – Locking is confirmed by the turn signals
– Driver's door. and the horn. This function must be ac-
tivated in the settings, refer to
Press the button on the vehicle key page 80.
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points. – The alarm system, refer to page 81, is
switched on.
– All doors and tailgate.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on
In addition, the following functions are exe- when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
cuted: honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready
– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig- state must be switched off by means of the
nals and the horn. This function must be Start/Stop button.
activated in the settings, refer to
page 80.
– The settings stored in the driver profile,
refer to page 77, are applied.
69
With Comfort Access: convenient whether the tailgate can be unlocked with
closing the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
Safety information fer to page 80.
Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can Warning
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the Body parts can be jammed when operating
doors is clear during convenient closing. the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
Closing
hicle key in the area close to the ve- NOTICE
hicle. The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
The windows and the glass sunroof are erty, among other potential damage. Make
closed, as long as the button on the vehicle sure that the area of movement of the tail-
key is pressed. gate is clear during opening and closing.
Switch on interior lights and

courtesy light NOTICE
Press the button on the vehicle key Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
with the vehicle locked. windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property,
The MINI logo projection is also switched among other potential damage. Cover the
on. edges and ensure that pointed objects do
These functions are not available if the inte- not hit the windows.
rior lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Opening
After locking, wait 10 seconds before press- Press and hold the button on the ve-
ing the button again. hicle key for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
Tailgate upward.
General information Panic mode
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- You can trigger the alarm system if you find
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo yourself in a dangerous situation.
area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
70
– Press the button on the vehicle 3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of
key and hold for at least 3 sec- the battery compartment and raise the
onds. cover.
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle
key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
NOTE
Improper batteries in the vehicle key can
damage the vehicle key. There is a danger 4. Push battery in arrow direction using a
of damage to property. Always replace the pointed object and lift it out.
discharged battery with a battery with the
same voltage, the same size and the same
specification.
1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 73.
2. Slide the integrated key into the open-
ing and raise the cover.
The battery compartment is accessible.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with
the positive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle
key until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or specialist
workshop or take them to a collection point.
Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from a
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-
placed by a dealer’s service center or an-
71
other qualified service center or repair Switching on the drive-ready state via
shop. emergency detection of the vehicle
key
Malfunction
General information
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circum-
stances:
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer
to page 71. It is not possible to switch on the drive-
– Interference of the radio connection ready state if the vehicle key has not been
from transmission towers or other detected.
equipment with high transmitting Proceed as follows in this case:
power.
1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
on the steering column as shown. Pay
objects.
attention to the display in the instru-
Do not transport the vehicle key to- ment cluster.
gether with metal objects.
2. If the vehicle key is detected:
– Interference of the radio connection
Switch on drive-ready state within
from mobile phones or other electronic
10 seconds.
devices in direct proximity to the vehi-
cle key. If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
change the position of the vehicle key and
Do not carry the vehicle key in close
repeat the procedure.
proximity to other electronic devices.
– Interference of radio transmission by a Frequently Asked Questions
charging process of mobile devices, for
instance charging of a mobile phone. What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked
– The vehicle key is in direct proximity of in vehicle key?
the wireless charging tray.
– The options provided by the Remote
Place the vehicle key in a different loca- Services of the MINI Connected app in-
tion. clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-
In the case of interference, the vehicle can hicle.
be unlocked and locked from the outside This requires an active MINI Connected
with the integrated key, refer to page 73. contract and the MINI Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
– Unlocking the vehicle can be requested
via the MINI Connected Call Center.
An active MINI Connected contract is
required.
72
Integrated key Removing
General information
The driver's door can be locked and un-
locked without the vehicle key using the
integrated key.
Safety information
Warning Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

Unlocking from the inside is only possible integrated key, arrow 2.
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the Locking/unlocking via the door
vehicle while being exposed to extreme
temperatures are at risk of injury or death. lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside 1. Remove lid on the door lock.
when there are people in it. To do this, slide the integrated key into
the opening from below and remove the
lid.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the
integrated key can be damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Remove the integrated
key before pulling the external door han-
dle.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the
vehicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the
door is opened, if the vehicle has been un-
locked via the door lock.
73
Buttons for the central locking Comfort Access

system
Concept
General information The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
In the event of a severe accident, the vehi- ing the vehicle key.
cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
warning system and interior lights come on. your pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-
Overview cle key when it is in close proximity or in
the car's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following
functions:
– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
– Convenient closing.
– Open the tailgate.
Buttons for the central locking system. Functional requirements
– To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must
Locking be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
– The next unlocking and locking cycle is
not possible until after approx. 2 sec-
The vehicle is not secured against theft onds.
when locking.
Unlocking
Unlocking
Press the button.
Opening
– Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
On the driver's or front passenger's outer
door handle, press the button.
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 80, only the driver's door may be un-
locked. Unlike when unlocking using the ve-
hicle key, pressing the button on the outer
74
door handle again does not unlock the other Closing

vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is
locked again.
If the vehicle was locked automatically after
driving off or with the button of the central
locking system from the inside, note the fol-
lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is
opened from the inside with the door
opener, pressing the button on the outer
door handle will first lock the vehicle again.
To unlock, the button on the outer door han-
dle must be pressed again. Press and hold down the button on the driv-
er's or front passenger's outer door handle.
Locking In addition to locking, the windows and
glass sunroof will be closed.
To open the tailgate

General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
On the driver's or front passenger's outer area.
door handle, press the button.
Safety information
Convenient closing
Warning
Safety information Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
Warning sure that the area of movement of the tail-
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing. NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty, among other potential damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
75
devices in direct proximity to the vehi-

NOTICE cle key.
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the Do not carry the vehicle key in close
windows and heat conductors while driv- proximity to other electronic devices.
ing. There is a risk of damage to property, Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the
among other potential damage. Cover the locking request recognition function on the
edges and ensure that pointed objects do door handles.
not hit the windows.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and
lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve-
Opening hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to
page 73.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
area.
Press button next on tailgate. Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung whether the tailgate can be unlocked with
upward. the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
Malfunction fer to page 80.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circum- Safety information
stances:
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis- Warning
charged. For replacing the battery, refer Body parts can be jammed when operating
to page 71. the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
– Interference of the radio connection sure that the area of movement of the tail-
from transmission towers or other gate is clear during opening and closing.
equipment with high transmitting
power.
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal NOTICE
objects. The tailgate swings back and up when it
Do not transport the vehicle key to- opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
gether with metal objects. erty, among other potential damage. Make
– Interference of the radio connection sure that the area of movement of the tail-
from mobile phones or other electronic gate is clear during opening and closing.
76
With manual transmission:

NOTICE With the vehicle stationary, press
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the the button in the driver's floor area twice in
windows and heat conductors while driv- quick succession.
ing. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Cover the Closing
edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the windows.
Opening and closing

Opening from the outside
Recessed grips on the interior trim of the

tailgate can be used to conveniently pull
down the tailgate.
Driver profiles
– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- Concept
cle or have the vehicle key with you.
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
Press button next on tailgate. several drivers can be stored and called up
– Press and hold the button on the again when required.
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may General information
also be unlocked. Unlocking using the There are three driver profiles with which
vehicle key, refer to page 70. personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung ery vehicle key has been assigned one of
upward. these driver profiles.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle
Opening from the inside key, the assigned personal driver profile will
With Steptronic transmission: be activated. All settings stored in the
driver profile are automatically applied.
With the vehicle stationary, press
the button in the driver's floor area. If several drivers use their own vehicle
keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set-
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- tings as it is being unlocked. These settings
tion P must be engaged first. are also restored, if the vehicle has been
used in the meantime by a person with a
different vehicle key.
77
Changes to the settings are automatically – Rearview camera.

stored in the driver profile currently acti- – Head-up Display.
vated.
– MINI Driving Modes.
If another driver profile is selected via the
Central Information Display (CID), the set- – Intelligent Safety.
tings stored in it will be applied automati-
cally. The new driver profile is assigned to Profile management
the vehicle key that is currently in use.
There is an additional guest profile available
Selecting a driver profile
that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif-
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle ferent driver profile may be activated. This
without changing the personal driver pro- allows you to call up personal vehicle set-
files. tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle
with your own vehicle key.
Functional requirements Via the Central Information Display (CID):
For the system to be able to identify the 1. "My MINI"
driver profile associated to a particular
driver, the detected vehicle key must be 2. "Driver profiles"
clearly allocated to the driver. 3. Select driver profile.
This is the case when: 4. "OK"
– The driver is only carrying his or her – All settings stored in the selected driver
own vehicle key. profile are automatically applied.
– The driver unlocks the vehicle. – The called-up driver profile is assigned
– The driver gets into the vehicle through to the vehicle key being used at the
the driver's door. time.
– If the driver profile is already assigned
Settings to a different vehicle key, this driver
The settings, for instance for the following profile will apply to both vehicle keys.
systems and functions, are stored in the ac-
tive profile. The scope of storable settings Using a guest profile
depends on country and equipment. The guest profile is for individual settings
– Unlocking and locking. that are stored in none of the three personal
driver profiles.
– Lights.
– Radio.
– Instrument cluster. 1. "My MINI"
– Programmable memory buttons. 2. "Driver profiles"
– Volumes, sound. 3. "Drive off (guest)"
– Control Display. 4. "OK"
– Climate control. The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is
– Navigation. not assigned to the vehicle key currently in
use.
– PDC Park Distance Control.
78
Renaming a driver profile The driver profile marked with this

A personal name can be assigned to the ac- icon can be exported.
tive driver profile to avoid confusion be- 4. "Export driver profile (USB)"
tween the driver profiles. Select USB storage device as needed.
Importing driver profiles
1. "My MINI"
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im-
2. "Driver profiles" ported via the USB port.
3. Select driver profile. The existing settings of the active driver
The driver profile marked with this profile are overwritten with the settings of
icon can be renamed. the imported driver profile.
4. "Change driver profile name" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
5. Enter profile name. 1. "My MINI"
6. Select the icon. 2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
Resetting a driver profile
The driver profile marked with this
The settings of the driver profile currently icon can be overwritten.
in use are reset to their factory settings.
4. "Import driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
1. "My MINI" 5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile. Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profile marked with this The driver profiles can be displayed at each
icon can be reset. startup to select the desired profile.
4. "Reset driver profile" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
5. "OK" 1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
Exporting driver profiles
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
Most settings of the active driver profile
can be exported.
System limits
Exporting is helpful when storing and re-
trieving personal settings, for instance be- A clear assignment between the vehicle key
fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop. and driver may not be possible in the fol-
The stored driver profiles can be taken into lowing cases, for example.
another vehicle. – The passenger unlocks the vehicle with
Via the Central Information Display (CID): his or her own vehicle key, but another
person is driving.
1. "My MINI" – The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-
2. "Driver profiles" fort Access and has multiple vehicle
keys with him or her.
3. Select driver profile.
79
– The driver changes, but the vehicle is The text next to the icon indicates the
not locked and unlocked. current setting.
– Multiple vehicle keys are located out- 5. Select the desired setting:
side of the vehicle. – "Tailgate"
Only the tailgate is unlocked.
Settings – "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are un-
locked.
General information
– "Tailgate opens after unlocking"
Depending on the package and country ver-
sion, various settings are available for the The vehicle must be unlocked before
vehicle key functions. the tailgate can be used with the ve-
hicle key.
These settings are stored for the driver pro-
file, refer to page 77, currently used. – "Button lock"
It is not possible to use the tailgate
Unlocking via the vehicle key.
Doors country version, this setting may not be of-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): fered.
1. "My MINI" Automatic locking

2. "Vehicle settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
3. "Doors/Key" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" 2. "Vehicle settings"
5. Select the desired setting: 3. "Doors/Key"
– "Driver's door only"
4. Select the desired setting:
Only the driver's door is unlocked.
– "Lock automatically"
Pressing again unlocks the entire ve-
hicle. The vehicle locks automatically after
a while if no door is opened after un-
– "All doors"
locking.
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
– "Lock after starting to drive"
Tailgate The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
1. "My MINI" Automatic unlocking
2. "Vehicle settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
3. "Doors/Key" 1. "My MINI"
4. 2. "Vehicle settings"
80
3. "Doors/Key" – Locking the vehicle while a device is

4. "Unlock at end of trip" connected to the socket for the OBD On-
board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD
After drive-ready state is switched off Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 261.
by pressing the Start/Stop button, the
locked vehicle is automatically un- The alarm system signals these changes vis-
locked. ually and acoustically:
– Acoustic alarm:
Confirmation signals from the Depending on local regulations, the
vehicle acoustic alarm may be suppressed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): – Visual alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning sys-
1. "My MINI"
tem and headlights, where required.
2. "Vehicle settings" Do not modify the system to ensure func-
3. "Doors/Key" tion of the alarm system.
4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-
firmation signals. Overview
– "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
– With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Alarm system
Switching on/off
General information
The alarm system is switched on or off as
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi-
alarm system reacts to the following cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort
changes: Access.
– Unauthorized opening of a door, the
hood or the tailgate. Opening the doors with the alarm
– Movements in the vehicle interior. system switched on
– Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, The alarm system is triggered when a door
during attempts at stealing a wheel or is opened if the door was unlocked using
when towing the vehicle. the integrated key in the door lock.
– Disconnected battery voltage. Switching off the alarm, refer to page 83.
– Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis.
81
Opening the tailgate with the alarm – The indicator light flashes after unlock-
system switched on ing until standby state is switched on,
but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on. An alarm has been triggered.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
Tilt alarm sensor
locked. The hazard warning system flashes The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
once. The alarm system responds in situations
such as attempts to steal a wheel or when
Panic mode the vehicle is towed.
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation. Interior motion sensor
– Press the button on the vehicle The windows and the glass sunroof must be
key and hold for at least 3 sec- closed for the system to function properly.
onds.
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle
Avoiding unintentional alarms
key three times in succession.
General information
To switch off the alarm: press any button. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-
Signals of the indicator light authorized action occurred.
– The indicator light flashes briefly every Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
2 seconds: – In automatic car washes.
The alarm system is switched on. – In duplex garages.
– Indicator light flashes for approx. – During transport on trains carrying ve-
10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every hicles, at sea or on a trailer.
2 seconds:
– With animals in the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-
sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or
tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-
tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-
uations.
rectly closed access points are secured.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or interior motion sensor
trunk lid are not correctly closed. Cor-
rectly closed access points are secured. Press the button on the vehicle key
When the still open access points are within 10 seconds as soon as the
closed, the interior motion sensor and vehicle is locked.
tilt alarm sensor will be switched on. The indicator light lights up for approx.
– The indicator light goes out after un- 2 seconds and then continues to flash.
locking: The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
The vehicle has not been tampered with. sensor are switched off until the vehicle is
locked again.
82
Switching off the alarm Opening

– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
– Press the switch to the resistance
– Unlock the vehicle with the integrated point.
key and activate the standby state via
emergency detection of the vehicle key, The window opens while the switch is
refer to page 72. being held.
– With Comfort Access: if you have the – Press the switch beyond the resist-
vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle ance point.
using the button on the driver's side or
passenger side door. The window opens automatically. Press-
ing the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening with the vehicle key,
Power windows refer to page 69.
Closing
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, – Pull the switch to the resistance
the windows are automatically closed ex- point.
cept a gap. The window closes while the switch is
being held.
Safety information
– Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
Warning
The window closes automatically if the
When operating the windows, body parts door is closed. Pulling the switch again
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk stops the motion.
of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re-
the windows is clear during opening and fer to page 70.
closing. Closing via Comfort Access, refer to
page 75.
Overview Jam protection system

Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
closed.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while
Power windows a window is being closed, the closing action
is interrupted.
83
Safety information gree of overheating, it may only be pos-

sible to close the window or it may not
be possible to operate it at all.
Warning
In this case: allow the power window
Accessories on the windows such as an- motor to cool down.
tennas can impact jam protection. There is
a risk of injury. Do not install accessories Initializing the system
in the area of movement of the windows.
The system can be initialized when the ve-
hicle is stationary and the drive-ready state
Closing without the jam protection is switched on.
system During initialization, the affected window
In case of danger from the outside or if ice closes without jam protection.
might prevent normal closing, proceed as
follows: Warning
When operating the windows, body parts
1. Pull the switch past the resistance and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
point and hold it there. of injury or risk of damage to property.
The window closes with limited jam pro- Make sure that the area of movement of
tection. If the closing force exceeds a the windows is clear during opening and
specific threshold, closing is inter- closing.
rupted.
1. Open the affected window completely.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds 2. Pull the switch to the resistance
and hold it there. point and hold.
The window closes without jam protec- The window closes.
tion.
3. Continue holding the switch pulled
Malfunction to the resistance point.
The window opens and closes once or
General information twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-
In certain situations a window can only be ing on the vehicle's equipment.
operated to a limited extent. 4. Release switch.
– After a power failure during the opening
or closing process, the a window can
only be operated to a limited extent. The Panoramic glass sunroof
system must be initialized in this case.
– The power window motors are equipped General information
with overheating protection. If a win-
dow is opened and closed several times In the event of a severe accident, the glass
within a short period of time, the over- sunroof is automatically closed.
heating protection switches the motor
off temporarily. Depending on the de-
84
Safety information With the glass sunroof completely

raised
Warning – Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. The glass sunroof is
Make sure that the area of movement of opened as long as the
the glass sunroof is clear during opening switch is pressed.
and closing. – Press the switch back beyond the resist-
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Overview
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof
is not fully open. In these models, the auto-
matic function initially only opens the glass
sunroof up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass
sunroof fully.
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or Closing glass sunroof
beyond the resistance point
and release it. With the glass sunroof open
The glass sunroof is raised. – Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed
Opening glass sunroof as long as the switch is
pressed and stops in the
When the glass sunroof is closed raised position.
Press the switch back beyond – Press the switch forward beyond the re-
the resistance point and resistance point and release it.
lease it twice. The glass sunroof is closed and stops in
The glass sunroof is opened. the raised position.
Pressing the switch again Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
stops the motion. tion.
– Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
85
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-

tion.
With the glass sunroof completely

raised
Press the switch forward be- 1. Push the switch forward past the resist-
yond the resistance point and ance point and hold it.
release it. The glass sunroof closes with limited
The glass sunroof is closed. jam protection. If the closing force ex-
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-
terrupted.
Opening/closing the sun protection 2. Push the switch forward again past the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power

interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. The system
Use the handle to slide the sun protection must be initialized in this case. MINI rec-
into the desired position. ommends having this work performed only
by a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts from becoming jammed between the
roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-
roof is closing.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while
the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-
ing action is interrupted.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection

system
If there is an external danger, proceed as
follows:
86
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- With a backrest inclined too far to the
specific and optional features offered with rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no
the series. It also describes features and longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid-
functions that are not necessarily available ing under the safety belt in an accident.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
tions or country versions. This also applies Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.
to safety-related functions and systems. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
When using these functions and systems, most upright position as possible and do
the applicable laws and regulations must be not adjust again while driving.
observed.
Warning
Sitting safely There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of damage to property. Make sure that the
of the occupants can make a vital contribu- area of movement of the seat is clear prior
tion to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. to any adjustment.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat
position plays an important role. Follow the
information in the following chapters:
Adjusting seats
– Seats, refer to page 87. Overview
– Safety belts, refer to page 90.
– Head restraints, refer to page 92.
– Airbags, refer to page 144.
Front seats
Safety information
1 Forward/backward
Warning
2 Thigh support
Seat setting while driving can lead to un-
3 Height
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of ac- 4 Backrest tilt
cident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
87
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Forward/backward Backrest tilt
Warning
Unexpected movements of the seat while
driving may occur if the seat is unlocked.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of accident. After adjusting, move the
seat forward or back slightly, making sure
the seat engages properly.
Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the

backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-
sired direction.
Height
Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-

crease the curvature.
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as

needed to reach the desired height.
88
Thigh support gages correctly by slightly moving forward

and back.
Fold the seat backrest forward

1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-

just the thigh support.
Entering the rear

2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
Safety information
3. Push the seat forward.
Warning Original position

There is a risk of jamming when moving The driver's seat features a mechanical
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk memory function for forward/back and
of damage to property. Make sure that the backrest adjustment.
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment. 1. Push the seat back into the original po-
sition.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Warning If the backrest is folded back when the seat
Unexpected movements of the seat while is not yet in the original position, the seat
driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. engages in the current position. In this
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a case, manually adjust longitudinal direction,
risk of accident. After adjusting, move the refer to page 88.
seat forward or back slightly, making sure
the seat engages properly.
Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
backrest while driving may occur if the
rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of in-
jury. Fold back and lock the backrests be-
fore driving. Make sure the backrest en-
89
Front seat heating Although airbags enhance safety by provid-

ing added protection, they do not replace
Overview safety belts.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the
rear from the belt buckle on the side.
All belt fastening points are designed to
achieve the best possible protective effect
of the safety belts with proper use of the
safety belts and correct seat setting. Follow
notes on sitting safely, refer to page 87.
Safety information
Seat heating
Warning
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
Switching on one person will potentially defeat the abil-
ity of the safety belt to serve its protective
Press the button once for each tem- function. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
perature level. ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-
The maximum temperature is reached when son to wear a single safety belt. Infants
three LEDs are lit. and children are not allowed on an occu-
If the trip is continued within approx. pant's lap, but must be transported and se-
15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is cured in designated child restraint sys-
switched on automatically with the temper- tems.
ature selected last.
When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to
page 226, the heating output is reduced. Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including
Switching off safety belts, can be limited or lost when
safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
Press and hold the button until the incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause
LEDs go out. additional injuries, for instance in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
Safety belts danger to life. Make sure that all occu-
pants are wearing safety belts correctly.
General information
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts Warning
to ensure occupant safety. However, they The efficacy of safety gear, including
can only unfold their protective effect when safety belts, may not be fully functional or
adjusted correctly. fail in the following situations:
Always make sure that safety belts are be-
ing worn by all occupants before driving off.
90
–The safety belts or safety belt buckles 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety
are damaged, soiled, or changed in belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must
any other way. engage audibly.
– Belt tensioners or belt retractors
were modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged
in the event of an accident. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify
safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-
sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and
keep them clean. Have the safety belts
checked after an accident at the dealer’s
center or repair shop. Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
Correct use of safety belts 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-
to your body over your lap and should- up mechanism.
ers.
– Wear the safety belt deep on your hips Safety belt reminder for driver's
over your lap. The safety belt may not seat and front passenger seat
press on your stomach.
– Do not rub the safety belt against sharp Display in the instrument cluster
edges, or guide it or jam it in across
hard or fragile objects. The indicator light lights up and a
signal sounds. Make sure that the
– Avoid thick clothing. safety belts are positioned correctly.
– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up- The safety belt reminder can also be acti-
ward around your upper body. vated if objects are placed on the front pas-
senger seat.
Buckling the safety belt
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over Safety belt reminder for rear seats
shoulder and hip to put it on.
General information
The safety belt reminder is automatically
activated each time the drive-ready state is
switched on.
The safety belt reminder is also activated
when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat
safety belt during the trip.
91
Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light in the instrument cluster Warning
illuminates after switching on the drive- Objects on the head restraint reduce the
ready state. protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
Icon Description
– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
Green: the safety belt is buckled ers.
on the corresponding rear seat.
– Do not hang objects, for instance
clothes hangers, directly on the head
Red: the safety belt is not buckled
restraint.
on the corresponding rear seat.
– Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
Front head restraints – Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Safety information
Adjusting the height
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head
restraints can cause injuries in the head
and neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head – To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
restraint is as close as possible to the push the head restraint down.
back of the head. Adjust the distance – To raise: push the head restraint up.
via the backrest tilt as needed. After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Warning
Removing
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Only remove the head restraint if no one
Make sure that the area of movement is will be sitting in the seat in question.
clear when moving the head restraint.
92
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
Warning
1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
forward.
protective effect in the head and neck
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible. area. There is a risk of injury.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the – Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
head restraint out completely. ers.
– Do not hang objects, for instance
Installing clothes hangers, directly on the head
Proceed in the reverse order to install the restraint.
head restraint. – Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
Rear head restraints – Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Safety information
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head
restraints can cause injuries in the head
and neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head – To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
restraint is as close as possible to the push the head restraint down.
back of the head. Adjust the distance – To raise: push the head restraint up.
via the backrest tilt as needed. After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
93
Fold down Mirrors

Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
Safety information
– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, ar- Warning
row 2. Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
– Forward: fold the head restraint toward than they appear. The distance to the traf-
the front as far as it will go. Make sure fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,
that the head restraint engages cor- for instance while changing lanes. There is
rectly. a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to
the traffic behind by looking over your
shoulder.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one
will be sitting in the seat in question. Overview
1 Adjusting
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer
to page 215, in question. 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist-
ance. 3 Folding in and out
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely. Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Installing
Slide the switch.
Proceed in the reverse order to install the
head restraint.
94
Adjusting electrically Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Press the button.
Flip lever
The mirror movement follows the
button movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust
the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-
ror glass.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
heated as needed and when the standby mirror, flip the lever forward.
state is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature Turn button

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is
automatically dimmed. Photocells in the
car's interior mirror, refer to page 96, are
used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior

mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass Turn the button to reduce the blinding ef-
on the front passenger side is tilted down- fect by the interior mirror.
ward. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking,
for instance.
Activating
1. slide the switch to the driver's
side mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir-
ror position.
95
Interior mirror, automatic dimming Adjusting

feature
Overview
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat
Photocells are used for control: position.
– In the mirror glass. 3. Fold the lever back up.
– On the back of the mirror.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
– Keep the photocells clean.
– Do not cover the area between the inte-
rior mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning Heated steering wheel

Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost. Switching on/off
There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the Press the button.
steering wheel while the vehicle is sta-
tionary only.
– On: the LED lights up.
– Off: the LED goes out.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after an intermediate stop, the heated
steering wheel switches on automatically if
the function was switched on at the end of
the last trip.
96
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Transporting children safely

Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- A heated vehicle may result in death to
specific and optional features offered with persons, especially children, or animals.
the series. It also describes features and There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
functions that are not necessarily available Do not leave persons, especially children,
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- or animals unattended in the vehicle.
When using these functions and systems, Warning
the applicable laws and regulations must be Exposure to intense sunlight can cause
observed. child restraint systems and their compo-
nents to become very hot. Persons may
sustain burn injuries when touching the
The right place for children hot components. There is a risk of injury.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
Safety information direct sunlight or cover where necessary.
If necessary, let the child restraint system
cool down before transporting a child. Do
Warning not leave children unattended in the vehi-
Unattended children or animals in the ve- cle.
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions: Transport children in the rear seat
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
General information
– Releasing the parking brake.
Accident research shows that the safest
– Opening and closing the doors or place for children is in the rear seat.
windows.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
– Engaging selector lever position N. shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be trans-
– Using vehicle equipment. ported in the rear seat in suitable child re-
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do straint systems designed for the age, weight
not leave children or animals unattended and size of the child. Children 13 years of
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with age or older must wear a safety belt as soon
you when exiting and lock the vehicle. as a suitable child restraint system can no
longer be used due to their age, weight, or
size.
97
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Safety information
Warning
Warning The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor- seat setting or improper installation of the
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
150 cm without suitable additional child danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
restraint systems. The efficacy of safety straint system fits securely against the
gear, including safety belts, can be limited backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
or lost when safety belts are fastened in- tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
belt can cause additional injuries, for in- backrests are securely engaged or locked.
stance in the event of an accident, braking If possible, adjust the height of the head
or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- restraints or remove them.
juries or danger to life. Secure children
shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.
Installing child restraint sys-
Children on the front passenger tems
seat
General information
General information Pay attention to the specifications of the
Before using a child restraint system on the child restraint system manufacturer when
front passenger seat, ensure that the front, selecting, installing, and using child re-
knee, and side airbags on the front passen- straint systems.
ger side are deactivated. For automatic de- In order to facilitate the installation of a
activation of front-seat passenger airbags, back-facing child restraint system in the
refer to page 146. rear:
Safety information Move the front passenger seat as far up as
possible before folding down the backrest.
Warning Safety information

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-
jure a child in a child restraint system Warning
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front- The protective effect of child restraint sys-
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and tems and their fastening systems which
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
tor light lights up. dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot
be properly restrained in the event of an
accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
98
Do not use child restraint systems which that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
have been damaged or exposed to an acci- tor light lights up.
dent.
If a child restraint system and its fasten- Before installing a child restraint system in
ing system has been damaged or exposed the front passenger seat, make sure that the
to an accident, have these systems front, knee and side airbags on the front
checked and replaced by the dealer's serv- passenger side are deactivated.
ice center or another qualified service cen- Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
ter or repair shop. automatically, refer to page 146.
Seat position and height

Warning After installing a child restraint system,
The stability of the child restraint system move the front passenger seat as far back as
is limited or compromised with incorrect possible and adjust its height to the highest
seat setting or improper installation of the and thus best possible position for the belt
child seat. There is a risk of injuries or and to offer optimal protection in the event
danger to life. Make sure that the child re- of an accident.
straint system fits securely against the If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest located in front of the belt guide of the child
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly seat, move the front passenger seat care-
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and fully forward until the best possible belt
backrests are securely engaged or locked. guide position is reached.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them. Child seat security
On the rear seats

In order to facilitate the installation of a
back-facing child restraint system:
Move the front passenger seat as far up as
possible before folding down the backrest.
On the front passenger seat

The rear safety belts and the front passen-
Deactivating airbags ger safety belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- Locking the safety belt
jure a child in a child restraint system
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front- 2. Secure the child restraint system with
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and the safety belt.
99
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and and that the LATCH child restraint fixing
pull it tight against the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest.
system. The safety belt is disabled.
Unlocking the safety belt Warning

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. The attachment points for child restraint
2. Remove the child restraint system. systems in the vehicle are intended for at-
taching child restraint systems only.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com- When other objects are mounted, the an-
pletely. chors can be damaged. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. At-
tach only child restraint systems at the
LATCH child restraint fixing corresponding attachment points.
system
Position
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil- Icon Meaning
dren.
The corresponding icon
Pay attention to the operating and safety in- shows the mounts for the
formation from the child restraint system lower LATCH anchors.
manufacturer when installing and using
Seats equipped with lower
LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
anchors are marked with a
pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
Before installing LATCH child
General information restraint fixing systems
The lower anchors may be used to attach Pull the safety belt away from the area of
the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com- the child restraint system.
bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg
when the child is restrained by the internal Assembly of LATCH child restraint
harnesses. fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manu-
Safety information facturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are
Warning properly engaged.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-
tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-
tive effect of the LATCH child restraint
fixing system is limited. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. Make sure that
the lower anchors are securely engaged
100
Child restraint systems with tether the rear seat backrest or the rear window
strap shelf.
Safety information Routing the retaining strap
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the
protective effect is reduced. There is a risk
of injury. Make sure that the upper retain-
ing strap does not run over sharp edges
and is not twisted as it passes the upper
anchor.
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
Warning
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-
4 Anchor
tective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or there is none. In certain situa- 5 Seat backrest
tions, for instance braking maneuvers or 6 Upper retaining strap
in case of an accident, the rear backrest
can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the rear Attaching the upper retaining strap to
backrests are locked. the anchor
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-
Warning ing strap between or along both sides of
The attachment points for child restraint the supports of the head restraint to the
systems in the vehicle are intended for at- anchor.
taching child restraint systems only. 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
When other objects are mounted, the an- the anchor on the rear seat.
chors can be damaged. There is a risk of 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
injury or risk of damage to property. At- down.
tach only child restraint systems at the
corresponding attachment points.
Anchors
The respective icon shows the an-
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this icon. It can be found on
101
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and options – If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with
drive-ready state switched off manually.
specific and optional features offered with – After approx. 8 minutes.
the series. It also describes features and – When the vehicle is locked using the
functions that are not necessarily available central locking system.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- – If the charge state of the batteries is
tions or country versions. This also applies low.
Radio-ready state remains active if, for in-
stance drive-ready state is automatically
switched off for the following reasons:
observed.
– Opening or closing the driver's door.
– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
Start/Stop button – When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Concept Radio-ready state is also switched back on
if the on/off button on the radio is pressed
Pressing the Start/Stop button when the vehicle is parked.
switches standby state on or
off. If drive-ready state is switched on: the sys-
tem automatically switches to radio-ready
Drive-ready state is switched state when the driver's door is opened and
on when you depress the the driver's safety belt is unbuckled if the
brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop lights are switched off or the daytime run-
button. ning lights are switched on.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again
switches drive-ready state back off and Standby state
radio-ready state is switched back on.
All electrical consumers are ready for opera-
The drive-ready state cannot be activated as tion. Odometer and trip odometer are dis-
long as the charging cable is connected, re- played in the instrument cluster.
fer to page 230.
To preserve the battery, use standby state
and activated electrical consumers only as
Radio-ready state long as absolutely necessary.
Some electrical consumers are ready for op-
eration. Turning on standby state
The radio-ready state is switched off auto- Pressing the Start/Stop button switches
matically: standby state on or off.
Standby state is switched off automatically:
102
Driving CONTROLS
– When locking the vehicle, even if the Safety information

low beams are switched on.
– When opening or closing the driver NOTICE
door, if the driver's safety belt is un-
buckled and the low beams are switched Selector lever position P is automatically
off. engaged when drive-ready state is
switched off. There is a risk of damage to
– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck- property, among other potential damage.
led with driver's door open and low Do not switch drive-ready state off in car
beams off. washes.
– When the batteries' state of charge is
low, if the low beams are switched off.
– The low beams switch to parking lights
after approx. 15 minutes of no use. Drive-ready state in detail
– When the front doors are opened if
there is no other person sitting in the Safety information
front seats.
Warning
Drive-ready state
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Activated drive-ready state is the equiva-
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
lent of a running engine in conventional ve-
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
hicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is
cle against rolling.
equivalent to switching the engine off.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
If drive-ready state is switched on, the vehi-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
cle ready to drive and the pointer in the in-
lowing:
strument cluster is on READY signal, refer
to page 103. – Set the parking brake.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. – On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the
rection of the curb.
instrument cluster light up for a varied
length of time. – On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
To save battery power when parking, switch
stance with a wheel chock.
off drive-ready state and any unnecessary
electrical consumers.
The drive-ready state is switched off auto- Switching on drive-ready state
matically if the driver's safety belt is not 1. Close the driver's door.
buckled when the driver's door is opened.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
103
CONTROLS Driving
Display in the instrument cluster Selector lever positions

that the vehicle is ready for
driving.
Driving off
Driving is possible under the following con- The engaged selector lever position is dis-
ditions: played on the selector lever.
– The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged. D Drive
– The driver's door is closed. Position for normal vehicle operation.
– Charging cable is detached.
R is reverse
State of charge in strong temperature Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
fluctuations
In the case of strong temperature fluctua- N is Neutral
tions and a low state of charge of the high- The vehicle may be pushed or rolled with-
voltage battery, it may not be possible to out drivetrain, for instance in car washes,
start the vehicle again at the beginning of refer to page 105, in selector lever posi-
the next trip. Recharge vehicle with a low tion N.
state of charge in time.
P Park
Driving Engage only while the vehicle is stationary
1. Switch on drive-ready state. and the brake is applied. The drive wheels
2. Apply the brake and engage the selector are blocked.
lever in position D or R. Selector lever position P is engaged auto-
3. Release the parking brake. matically in the following situations:
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive. – If the driver's safety belt is off, the driv-
er's door is open and neither brake nor
accelerator pedal are depressed while
drive-ready state is switched on and se-
lector lever position D or R is set.
– After switching off drive-ready state via
the Start/Stop button, if selector lever
position D or R is set.
– With standby state switched off.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that
selector lever position P is set. Otherwise,
104
Driving CONTROLS
the vehicle may begin to move. Also Set cally returns to the center position when
parking brake, refer to page 109. released.
Engaging selector lever positions

General information
– Interlock: the selector lever position P
can be exited only with drive-ready
state engaged.
– Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary,
press on the brake pedal before shifting
out of P or N; otherwise, the shift com-
mand will not be executed. Engaging P
– Shift lock: before shifting out of P, re-
move the charging cable from the vehi-
cle; otherwise, the shift command will
not be executed.
Engage D, N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector
lever position R. Press button P.
– Unintentional shifting from selector
lever position P into another selector Rolling or pushing the vehicle
lever position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the General information
selector lever lock.
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll
without its own power for a short distance,
for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when standby state is switched
off. There is a risk of damage to property,
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, among other potential damage. Do not
briefly push the selector lever in the de- switch standby state off in car washes.
sired direction, past a resistance point,
if needed. The selector lever automati-
105
CONTROLS Driving
1. Switch on drive-ready state while press- 5. Release Start/Stop button and brake.
ing on the brake pedal. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger
2. If necessary, release the parking brake. area and secure it against moving on its
own.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Engage selector lever position N. Switching off drive-ready state
5. Switch off drive-ready state. Park the vehicle. Noises from the electrical
In this way, standby state remains system such as for cooling the high-voltage
switched on, and a Check Control mes- system might still be audible.
sage is displayed. After stopping the vehicle:
The vehicle can roll. 1. Apply brake and engage the selector
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever in position P.
lever position P is automatically engaged af-
2. Set the parking brake.
ter approx. 15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
able to change the selector lever position. The READY indicator goes out and a
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, signal sounds.
if needed. In case of longer idle times, follow the
instructions in the Care chapter, refer to
Electronic unlocking of the page 277.
transmission lock
General information Driving in detail: eDRIVE
Electronically unlock the transmission lock
to maneuver vehicle from a danger area. Safety information
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set
the parking brake to prevent the vehicle DANGER
from rolling away. The braking power of the electric motor
can be stronger than for a vehicle with
Engaging selector lever position N combustion engine. Abrupt braking and
1. Hold the Start/Stop button pressed. slow-down may confuse other traffic.
2. Depress the brake pedal. There is a risk of accident. Carefully re-
lease the accelerator pedal. Adjust driving
3. Press and hold the selector lever in posi- style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
tion N. closely and actively intervene where ap-
A corresponding Check Control message propriate.
is displayed.
4. Press the selector lever again into posi-
tion N within approx. 2 seconds.
Position N is indicated on the selector
lever.
106
Driving CONTROLS
The degree of the deceleration depends on

Warning the energy recovery, refer to page 108, set-
When driving in electric mode, pedes- ting.
trians and other traffic might pay less at- During the deceleration, energy is recov-
tention to the vehicle due to the lack of ered and the high-voltage battery is
engine noise. There is a risk of accident. charged.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively inter- Energy recovery: CHARGE
vene where appropriate. The high-voltage battery is recharged in
part through energy recovery. The electric
motor acts as a generator when decelerating
Warning and converts the kinetic energy into electri-
Without energy recovery, there is no brak- cal energy.
ing power of the electric motor available. Energy can be recovered if the following
The vehicle could roll further than antici- conditions are met:
pated. There is a risk of accident. Adjust – The vehicle is moving.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
– Speed higher than approx.
traffic closely and actively intervene
12 mph/20 km/h.
where appropriate.
– Selector lever position D or R is set.
– Accelerator pedal is not actuated or only
Accelerator pedal positions pressed down one third of the way.
Energy cannot be recovered in the following
situations:
– Selector lever position N is engaged.
– While drive stability control systems,
for instance DTC, are active and control-
ling the vehicle, even though this is not
indicated by an indicator light.
– The high-voltage battery is fully
charged.
1 Deceleration – When temperature of the high-voltage
2 Coasting battery is very low or very high.
3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePO- In winter it might be possible that the
WER energy recovery is temporarily unavaila-
ble after startup.
Deceleration
Exemplary traffic situations
Releasing the accelerator pedal causes de-
celeration similar to cautious braking. Addi- If a deceleration operation is foreseeable
tionally, the brake lights will come on with- while driving, this can be used for energy
out hitting the brakes. recovery.
The following exemplary driving situations
may be suitable:
107
CONTROLS Driving
– Decelerating downhill. Proactive driving reduces energy consump-

– Deceleration before a red light. tion and increases the range.
Avoid late or abrupt braking. Instead, decel- With vehicle rolling, no energy is recov-
erate the vehicle using energy recovery. ered.
Set energy recovery Exemplary traffic situations

If a route can be traveled without antici-
Concept pated need for braking, it is advantageous
to roll.
The energy recovery is adjustable.
The following exemplary driving situations
– High energy recovery: the vehicle decel-
may be suitable:
erates faster, more energy is returned to
the high-voltage battery. – Rolling on a straight downhill route
without obstacles.
– Low energy recovery: the vehicle decel-
erates more slowly, less energy is re- – Coasting on a route without obstacles.
turned to the high-voltage battery. Avoid late or abrupt braking.
Overview Acoustic pedestrian protection

The system generates a continuous driving
noise during electric driving up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to
the surroundings.
As a result, other road users, for instance
pedestrians or cyclists, can better perceive
the vehicle.
Energy recovery Heavily discharged high-voltage

battery
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis-
Adjusting charged during the trip, the performance
Press the button up or down. and some comfort features are reduced
step-by-step to extend the range.
– LED off: high energy recovery.
Heated high-voltage battery
– LED illuminated: low energy recovery.
The setting is briefly displayed in the in- With a stationary vehicle
strument cluster. In isolated cases, when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, it is possible for the high-voltage
Coasting battery to overheat, for instance, as a result
The electric drive makes it possible to roll of extreme hot or cold temperatures or di-
without consuming energy. This driving rect sunlight. Drive-ready state cannot be
condition is referred to as coasting.
108
Driving CONTROLS
switched on if the high-voltage battery is

overheated. Warning
A Check Control message is displayed. Unattended children or animals in the ve-
Another message will indicate when drive- hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
ready state is available again. endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions:
While driving – Pressing the Start/Stop button.
If the high-voltage battery overheats during – Releasing the parking brake.
the trip, the performance is reduced step- – Opening and closing the doors or
by-step in order to cool down the battery. windows.
The ePOWER performance display in the in-
– Engaging selector lever position N.
strument cluster decreases. If the tempera-
ture increases further, park the vehicle until – Using vehicle equipment.
the high-voltage battery has cooled down. If There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
the performance display falls to 0, the drive- not leave children or animals unattended
ready state is switched off and the vehicle in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
comes to a stop. you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Parking brake, electric Overview
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the ve-
hicle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move Parking brake
Setting
cured against rolling away, follow the fol- With a stationary vehicle
lowing:
Pull the switch.
– Set the parking brake.
The LED lights up.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di- The indicator light lights up red. The
rection of the curb. parking brake is set.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- Depending on the stopping situation, the
stance with a wheel chock. parking brake is engaged automatically.
109
CONTROLS Driving
In some parking situations, the parking Malfunction

brake is automatically engaged, when selec-
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions,
tor lever position P is engaged. In these
secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
cases, the parking brake is released auto-
iting.
matically when you leave the selector lever
position P. A Check Control message is displayed.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for
While driving instance with a wheel chock, after exiting
To use as emergency brake while driving: the vehicle.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle After a power failure
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled. Re-activating the parking brake
The indicator light lights up red, a 1. Switch on standby state.
signal sounds and the brake lights
light up. 2. Press the switch while stepping on
A Check Control message is displayed. the brake pedal or selector lever posi-
tion P is set.
If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete It may take several seconds for the brake to
stop, the parking brake is engaged. be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as-
sociated with this process are normal.
Releasing The indicator light in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the park-
Releasing manually ing brake is ready for operation.
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press the switch while stepping on

the brake pedal or selector lever posi- Hold function
tion P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out. Concept
The parking brake is released. The system holds the vehicle automatically
when gear is engaged. This prevents rolling
Automatic release against the direction of travel.
For automatic release, step on the accelera- In selector lever position D, the vehicle can-
tor pedal. not roll backwards. In selector lever posi-
tion R, it cannot roll forward. The brake
The LED and indicator light go out.
pedal does not have to be pressed.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator pedal un- Reducing energy consumption
der the following conditions:
To reduce energy consumption when the
– Standby state switched on. hold function is activated, activate the park-
– Gear position engaged. ing brake or engage the selector lever in po-
– Driver buckled in and doors closed. sition P when the vehicle is stopped for
long periods of time.
110
Driving CONTROLS
The hold function can be affected by the ve- Signaling briefly

hicle's load and the road incline. If needed, a Press the lever to the resistance point and
Check Control message will appear and po- hold it there for as long as you want the
sition P will be selected automatically. turn signal to flash.
Malfunction
Turn signal, high beams, head- Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light flasher light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
Turn signal
High beams, headlight flasher
Using turn signals Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
Press the lever past the resistance point. – High beams on, arrow 1.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting The high beams light up when the low
position after actuation. To switch off man- beams are switched on.
ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance – High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
point. row 2.
Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down. Wiper system
The triple turn signal duration can be ad-
justed. General information
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
1. "My MINI" dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
111
CONTROLS Driving
Safety information When travel is interrupted with the wiper

system switched on: when travel continues,
the wipers resume at their previous speed.
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded Switching off and brief wipe
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, Press the lever down.
the wiper blades can be torn off and the – Switching off: press the lever down until
wiper motor can overheat when switching it reaches its standard position.
on. There is a risk of damage to property, – Brief wipe: press the lever down from
among other potential damage. Defrost the the standard position.
windshield prior to switching the wipers The lever automatically returns to its in-
on. itial position when released.
Switching on Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
Press the lever up until the desired position wiper operation is preset.
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent operation or rain sensor,
position 1.
– Normal wiper speed, position 2.
– Fast wiper speed, position 3.
112
Driving CONTROLS
Safety information Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty, among other potential damage. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Activating
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Press the lever up once from its standard
position, arrow 1.
Wiping is started. Windshield washer system
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Safety information
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
not start.
Warning
Deactivating The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
Press the lever back into the standard posi- view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
tion. the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.
113
CONTROLS Driving
Cleaning the windshield Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
– In resting position: turn the switch
downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
Pull the lever. when released.
The system sprays washer fluid on the The function is deactivated if the washer
windshield and activates the wipers briefly. fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers

Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are auto- Concept
matically heated while standby state is
switched on. The fold-away position enables the wipers
to be folded away from the windshield.
Rear window wiper General information
Overview Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
Switching on switched off when the wipers are in the
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- NOTICE
verse gear is engaged, the system
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
switches to continuous operation.
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Defrost the
114
Driving CONTROLS
windshield prior to switching the wipers Canada: wiper system

on.
General information
Folding away the wipers Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
1. Switch standby state on and off again. dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-
til the wipers stop in a close to vertical
position. Safety information
Warning
switched off when the wipers are in the
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Folding down the wipers Switching on

After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
windshield.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation.
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-
ance point.
115
CONTROLS Driving
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once. Safety information

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point. NOTICE
The lever automatically returns to its initial If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
position when released. can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
Switching off and brief wipe erty, among other potential damage. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

– To switch off from fast wiper speed:
press down twice.
– To switch off from normal wiper speed:
Press the button on the wiper lever.
press down once.
Wiping is started.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:
The lever automatically returns to its initial
the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
position when released.
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
Interval mode or rain sensor not start.
If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen-
Concept sor switched on: if the trip is resumed
within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor
The rain sensor automatically controls the
is automatically activated again.
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
116
Driving CONTROLS
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Cleaning the windshield

the rain sensor
Pull the lever.

Turn the thumbwheel. The system sprays washer fluid on the
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- Windshield washer nozzles
sor sensitivity.
The windshield washer nozzles are auto-
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the matically heated while standby state is
rain sensor. switched on.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor. Rear window wiper
Windshield washer system Overview
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze, if needed. Switching on
Turn the outer switch upward.
NOTICE – Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0.
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended. – Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
There is a risk of damage to property, verse gear is engaged, the system
among other potential damage. Do not use switches to continuous operation.
the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.
117
CONTROLS Driving
Clean the rear window windshield prior to switching the wipers

Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- on.
tion.
– In resting position: turn the switch Folding away the wipers
downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
when released. 2. Press the wiper lever up past the point
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch of resistance and hold it for approx.
further, arrow 2. The switch automati- 3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a
cally returns to its interval position nearly vertical position.
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
to be folded away from the windshield.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
General information the windshield.
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage Folding down the wipers
switched off when the wipers are in the After the wipers are folded back down, the
folded away state and the wipers are wiper system must be reactivated.
folded in when switching on. 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
windshield.
NOTICE
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, to their resting position and are ready
the wiper blades can be torn off and the again for operation.
118
Driving CONTROLS
Washer fluid
NOTICE
General information Mixing different windshield washer con-
centrates or antifreeze can damage the
All washer nozzles are supplied from one washing system. There is a risk of damage
reservoir. to property, among other potential dam-
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield age. Do not mix different windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow
washer concentrate containing antifreeze the information and mixing ratios pro-
can be used. vided on the containers.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Overview
Safety information
Warning
Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-
ful substances and are flammable. There is
a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow
the instructions on the containers. Keep
antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do
not refill operating materials into different
bottles. Store operating materials out of The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
reach of children. engine compartment.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-
tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many Malfunction
individual states; do not exceed the allow- The use of undiluted windshield washer
able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
apply. Follow the usage instructions on the lead to incorrect readings at temperatures
washer fluid container. below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-
centrate or the equivalent is recom-
mended.
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the
windows can lead to damage to the wash-
ing system. There is a risk of damage to
Do not add silicon-containing additives to
the washer fluid.
119
CONTROLS Displays
Displays
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Performance display 122 Charging screen 121

2 Display/reset miles 127 4 Vehicle speed
3 Electronic displays 121 5 Indicator/warning lights
6 High-voltage battery charge indica-
tor 122
120
Displays CONTROLS
Electronic displays
1 Selector lever position 103 Range 128

2 Time 127 5 Messages, for instance Check Control
MINI Driving Modes switch sta- Selection lists 131
tus 170 Navigation instructions
3 Driver assistance systems 6 Total miles/trip odometer 127
4 Outside temperature 127 Trip computer 131
Charging screen Current range

3 Calculated range with fully charged the
Overview high-voltage battery
4 End of charging time 237
Departure time with timer 237
5 Departure time with timer 237
1 Stationary climate control 237

2 Charging status 237
121
CONTROLS Displays
Displays of the eDRIVE sys- The efficient range for electric driving ePO-
WER and energy recovery CHARGE is
tem shown in yellow.
Displays in the instrument cluster General information

Depending on the available power, the effi-
Concept cient range for electric driving ePOWER is
The display depends on the system's operat- adjusted automatically.
ing condition. The following functions of The efficient range for energy recovery de-
the eDRIVE system are shown in the instru- pends on the settings via the button for the
ment cluster energy recovery. Set energy recovery, refer
– High-voltage battery charge indicator. to page 108.
– Performance display. The available power may be reduced due to
the following factors:
– Drive-ready state: READY.
– Heavily discharged high-voltage battery.
High-voltage battery charge indicator – Extreme external temperatures.
– When driving on steep inclines, with a
Safety information sporty driving style or in other high-
power driving conditions.
Warning Optimizing the driving style, refer to
Even when it is indicated that the high- page 225.
voltage battery is discharged, the high-
voltage system is always still under high Display
voltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk of
injury. Do not touch or change live parts,
for instance orange high-voltage cables,
even when the batteries are discharged.
Display
The fill level bars indicate the
available charge state of the
high-voltage battery when Pointer in the CHARGE range, arrow 1: dis-
standby state and drive-ready play for energy recovery by coasting or
state are switched on. when decelerating:
– Both LEDs are illuminated yellow: high
Performance display energy recovery.
– One LED is illuminated yellow: low en-
Concept ergy recovery.
A pointer indicates the power output in a Pointer in the ePOWER range, arrow 2: effi-
scale. cient acceleration.
122
Displays CONTROLS
Drive-ready state: READY 3. Depending on the equipment, select the

following setting:
that the vehicle is ready for – "eDRIVE"
driving. Drive-ready state in – "Comfort information"
detail, refer to page 103.
Check Control
Indications on the Control Display
Concept
Energy flow of the eDRIVE system
The Check Control system monitors func-
General information tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-
functions in the monitored systems.
The display shows the eDRIVE system
while driving or charging the vehicle:
General information
– Yellow: electrical energy.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
– Arrow: direction of the energy flow. combination of indicator or warning lights
– The operating states, such as eDRIVE, and text messages in the instrument cluster
are displayed. and in the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-
Displaying the energy flow put and a text message may appear on the
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Control Display.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE" General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
Auxiliary users a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
General information functioning and light up temporarily when
The following information is displayed: drive-ready state is established.
– If necessary, information about settings
for energy recovery. Red lights
– Range potential when switching off in-
dividual auxiliary users. Safety belt reminder
– Current range. Indicator light flashes or is illumi-
nated: safety belt on the driver or
Display auxiliary users passenger side is not buckled. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger
1. "My MINI" seat.
2. "Technology in action" Make sure that the safety belts are posi-
tioned correctly.
123
CONTROLS Displays
Airbag system Yellow lights

Airbag system and belt tensioner
may not be working. Antilock Braking System ABS
Have the vehicle checked immedi- The Brake Assistant function may
ately by a dealer's service center or another not activate. Avoid abrupt braking.
qualified service center or repair shop. Take the longer braking distance
into account.
Parking brake, electric Have the system immediately
checked by a dealer's service center
The parking brake is set. or another qualified service center or repair
For releasing the parking brake, re- shop.
fer to page 110.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Brake system The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
Braking system impaired. Continue trols the drive and braking forces.
to drive moderately. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce
Have the vehicle checked immedi- speed and modify your driving style to the
ately by a dealer's service center or driving circumstances.
another qualified service center or The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-
repair shop. functioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer's serv-
Forward Collision Warning ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Indicator light illuminates: advance
DSC, refer to page 168.
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a
collision or the distance to the vehicle DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
ahead is too small. deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Increase the distance. Control is activated
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti-
imminent danger of a collision when the ve- vated.
hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela- DSC, refer to page 168, and DTC, re-
tively high differential speed. fer to page 169.
Intervene by braking or make an evasive
maneuver. Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The FTM signals a loss of tire infla-
Pedestrian Warning tion pressure in a tire.
If a collision with a detected person Reduce your speed and stop cau-
is imminent, the icon lights up and a tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
signal sounds. maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 153.
124
Displays CONTROLS
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Drive power

The indicator light illuminates: the The drive power is reduced, for in-
Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low stance due to a heavily discharged
tire inflation pressure or a flat tire. high-voltage battery.
Follow the information in the Check Control Heavily discharged high-voltage battery, re-
message. fer to page 128.
The indicator light flashes and is then illu-
minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres-
sure losses cannot be detected.
Green lights
– Interference caused by systems or devi- Turn signal
ces with the same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the interference, the Turn signal switched on.
system automatically becomes active Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-
again. cator light indicates that a turn sig-
– TPM was unable to complete the reset. nal bulb has failed.
Reset the system again. Turn signal, refer to page 111.
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics
is mounted: have it checked by a deal- Parking lights, headlight
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop as needed. Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
– Malfunction: have the system checked
by a dealer’s service center or another Parking lights/low beams, headlight
qualified service center or repair shop. control, refer to page 138.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 148.
Bad weather light
Steering system Bad weather light is switched on.
Steering system may not be working. Bad weather light, refer to page 141.
Have the system checked by a deal-
er's service center or another quali- High-beam Assistant
fied service center or repair shop. High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive automatically depending on the traf-
Acoustic pedestrian protection de- fic situation.
fective. High-beam Assistant, refer to page 140.
Have the system checked by a deal-
er's service center or another qualified serv- Cruise control
ice center or repair shop.
The system is switched on. It main-
tains the speed that was set using
the control elements on the steering
wheel.
125
CONTROLS Displays
Speed Limiter The messages can be hidden for approx.

The indicator light illuminates: the 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-
system is switched on. played again automatically.
The indicator light flashes: the set Temporary display
speed limit has been exceeded. If this hap-
pens, a signal sounds. Some Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Reduce speed or deactivate system. Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Lane departure warning
The indicator light lights up: the sys- Displaying stored Check Control
tem is activated. At least one lane messages
marking was detected and warnings Via the Central Information Display (CID):
can be issued.
1. "My MINI"
Lane departure warning, refer to page 162.
2. "Vehicle status"
Blue lights 3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
4. "Check Control"
High beams 5. Select the text message.
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 111. Display
Check Control
Hiding Check Control messages
At least one Check Control message
is displayed or stored.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a icon
in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the in-
dicator/warning lights.
Press the button on the turn signal lever. Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the
Continuous display cause of an error or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the With urgent messages the added text will
malfunction is eliminated. If several mal- be automatically displayed on the Control
functions occur at once, the messages are Display.
displayed consecutively. Depending on the Check Control message,
further help can be selected.
126
Displays CONTROLS
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Safety information

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status" Warning
3. Tilt the Controller to the left. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-
4. "Check Control" stance on bridges or shady sections of the
5. Select the desired text message. road. There is a risk of accident. Modify
6. Select the desired setting. your driving style to the weather condi-
tions at low temperatures.
Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving Display
are displayed again after standby state is
switched off. The outside temperature is
displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Odometer and trip odometer
Concept
The total mileage driven and the mileage Time
driven since the last reset are displayed in
the instrument cluster. The time is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Reset trip distance Set the time on the Central In-
Press the button. formation Display (CID), refer
– The odometer is displayed to page 48.
when the standby state is
switched off.
– When standby state is Date
switched on, the trip od-
ometer is reset. The date is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Set the date on the Central In-
Outside temperature formation Display (CID), refer
to page 48.
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-
nal sounds.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
127
CONTROLS Displays
Range no longer be calculated. A short range may

still be available depending on the environ-
mental conditions.
General information Re-establishing the drive-ready state can
Always make sure that the range is suffi- help increase the range slightly, for in-
cient for the planned trip. The range is dy- stance to remove the vehicle from a hazard-
namic and can abruptly change. ous area.
The range can be abruptly reduced or in-
creased based on the following factors:
State of charge in strong
– Driving style. temperature fluctuations
– Traffic conditions.
In the case of strong temperature fluctua-
– Program changes via the MINI Driving tions and a low state of charge of the high-
Modes switch. voltage battery, it may not be possible to
– Climate and terrain conditions. start the vehicle again at the beginning of
– Automatic climate control settings. the next trip. Recharge vehicle with a low
state of charge in time.
– After identification of a route through
the navigation system depending on the
route profile, route distance and se-
lected speed. Service notifications
– When exiting a route or recalculating a
route. Concept
Further information about the topic In- The function displays the service notifica-
creasing the range, refer to page 224. tions and the corresponding maintenance
Check Control messages indicate a limited scopes.
range.
General information
Display The driving distance or the time to the next
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly
The expected range for the en- in the instrument cluster after standby state
ergy stored in the high-volt- is switched on.
age battery is continuously
displayed in the instrument A service advisor can read out the current
cluster. service notifications from your vehicle key.
Display
Heavily discharged high-voltage
battery Detailed information on service
The high-voltage battery is notifications
heavily discharged. The drive More information on the type of service re-
power will be reduced. Heat- quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-
ing and climate control func- play.
tions will be deactivated. In Via the Central Information Display (CID):
this state, the exact range can
128
Displays CONTROLS
1. "My MINI" Automatic Service Request

2. "Vehicle status" Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automati-
3. Tilt the Controller to the left. cally transmitted to your dealer’s service
4. "Service required" center before your vehicle is due for serv-
Maintenance work and legally mandated ice.
inspections are displayed. You can check when your dealer’s service
5. Select an entry to call up detailed infor- center was notified.
mation. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
Symbols
2. "Vehicle status"
Symbols Description 3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
No service is currently re- 4. "Teleservice Call"
quired.
The time for recommended Speed Limit Info

maintenance or a legally
mandated inspection is ap-
proaching. Speed Limit Info
Service interval is exceeded. Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
mum permitted speed in the instrument
Entering appointment dates cluster.
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle General information
inspections.
The camera at the base of the interior mir-
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the
are set correctly.
road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic
Via the Central Information Display (CID): signs with extra symbols for wet road con-
1. "My MINI" ditions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as
2. "Vehicle status" from the rain sensor, and will be displayed
3. Tilt the Controller to the left. depending on the situation.
4. "Service required" With the navigation system, the system
takes into account the information stored in
5. "Vehicle inspection" the navigation data and also displays speed
6. "Date:" limits present on routes without signs.
129
CONTROLS Displays
Safety information With navigation system:

Speed Limit Info is not availa-
ble.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in
sessing visibility and traffic situation. the Head-up Display.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
System limits
propriate. The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the
following situations:
Overview – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
Camera – When traffic signs are fully or partially
concealed by objects, stickers or paint.
– When driving very close to the vehicle
in front of you.
– When driving toward bright lights or
strong reflections.
– When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered by a sticker, etc.
– In the event of incorrect detection by
The camera is installed near the interior the camera.
mirror.
– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-
Keep the windshield in front of the interior tion system are incorrect.
mirror clean and clear.
– In areas not covered by the navigation
system.
Display – When roads differ from the navigation,
Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru- such as due to changes in road routing.
ment cluster. – When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
Speed Limit Info
– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
The last speed limit detected. – When traffic signs that are valid for a
parallel road are detected.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
130
Displays CONTROLS
Selection lists Trip computer

General information Concept
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the The trip computer displays different vehicle
buttons on the steering wheel and the dis- data in the instrument cluster, such as aver-
play in the instrument cluster can be used age values.
to display or use the following:
– Current audio source. Calling up information
– Phone redial.
– Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the

setting
Button on the Function
steering wheel
Move selection up.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the instrument
Move selection cluster.
down.
Confirm the selec-
tion.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following informa-
Display tion:
– Average consumption.
– Average speed.
– Charge state of the high-voltage battery.
– Date.
– Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated
in the navigation system.
– Arrival time.
When destination guidance is activated
in the navigation system.
– Trip odometer.
The unit of some information can be
changed.
Setting units, refer to page 49.
131
CONTROLS Displays
Selecting information Resetting average values

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can select what information from the trip
computer can be accessed in the instrument
cluster.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel" Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
used.
Distance to destination
Information in detail distance remaining to the destination is dis-
played if a destination is entered in the nav-
Display of charge state of the high- igation system before the trip is started.
voltage battery as a percentage The distance to the destination is adopted
automatically.
The current charge state of
the high-voltage battery can Time of arrival
be displayed as a %-value.
estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation sys-
tem before the trip is started.
Average consumption
The time must be correctly set.
The average consumption is calculated on
the basis of various distances. Periods when
the vehicle is parked with drive-ready state
Trip computer on the Control
switched off are not considered. Display
Average speed Concept

Periods when the vehicle is parked with The trip computer displays different vehicle
drive-ready state switched off are not in- data on the Control Display, such as average
cluded when calculating average speed. values.
General information
Two types of trip computers are available
on the Control Display:
– "Onboard info": average values, such as
the consumption, are displayed. The val-
ues can be reset individually.
132
Displays CONTROLS
– "Trip computer": the values deliver an Speed warning

overview of a specific route and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Concept
Calling up the trip computer or The system can be used to set a speed limit.
onboard computer A warning will be issued when this speed
Via the Central Information Display (CID): limit is exceeded.
1. "My MINI" General information

2. "Driving information" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" exceeds the set speed limit again, after it
has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Resetting the trip computer
Adjusting
1. "My MINI"
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
4. "Warning at:"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer speed is displayed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 6. Press the Controller.
1. "My MINI" Activating/deactivating

2. "Driving information" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
3. "Trip computer"
1. "My MINI"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if
needed.
– "Reset": all values are reset. 3. "Speed warning"
– "Automatic reset": all values are 4. "Speed warning"
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-
cle has come to a standstill. Setting your current speed as the
5. If necessary, "OK" speed warning
1. "My MINI"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
133
CONTROLS Displays
LED ring on the central in- Setting the brightness

strument cluster The brightness can be adjusted when night
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
Concept Via the Central Information Display (CID):
The LED ring displays light animations to 1. "My MINI"
represent specific functions. 2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
Basic displays
Basic functions, such as the state of charge 4. "Center Instrument"
of the high-voltage battery, can be set to be 5. "Brightness at night"
displayed continually if so desired. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
Event displays
Functions that are only displayed tempora-
rily, for instance the volume or temperature The setting is stored for the driver profile
settings, can be set as event displays. currently used.
Several vehicle assistance functions can
also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-
play corresponds with the displays of the
Head-up Display
function in the respective display.
Concept
Switching on/off LED ring This system projects important information
Via the Central Information Display (CID): into the driver's field of vision, for instance
the speed.
1. "My MINI"
The driver can get information without
2. "System settings" averting his or her eyes from the road.
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument" General information
5. "Center Instrument" Follow the instructions for cleaning the
Head-up Display. For additional informa-
tion, see the chapter on care.
Adjusting the LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Safety information
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings" Warning
3. "Displays" When extending and retracting the projec-
tion screen of the Head-up Display, body
4. "Center Instrument" parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
5. "Basic display" or "Event display" jury. Make sure that the area of movement
6. Select the desired setting. of the projection screen is clear during
opening and closing.
134
Displays CONTROLS
– Vehicle speed.
NOTICE – Navigation instructions.
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive – Check Control messages.
components that can easily be scraped or
– Selection list from the instrument clus-
damaged. There is a risk of damage to
ter.
Do not place any objects on the Head-up – Driver assistance systems.
Display, attach to system components or Some of this information is only displayed
plug into the system. Do not move the briefly as needed.
moving parts manually.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Overview Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-
up Display.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
Switching the Head-up Display currently used.
on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of Setting the brightness
the Head-up Display is extended. When The brightness is automatically adjusted to
switching off, the projection lens of the the ambient brightness.
Head-up Display is retracted again. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID):
3. "Displays" 3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display" 4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Brightness"
Display 6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
Overview 7. Press the Controller.
The following information is displayed on When the low beams are switched on, the
the Head-up Display: brightness of the Head-up Display can be
135
CONTROLS Displays
additionally influenced using the instru- – Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-
ment lighting, refer to page 142. play.
The setting is stored for the driver profile – Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-
currently used. ters.
– Wet roads.
Adjusting the height – Unfavorable light conditions.
1. "My MINI"
Vehicle status
3. "Displays"
General information
4. "Head-Up Display"
The status can be displayed and actions per-
5. "Height" formed for several systems.
height is reached. Going to the vehicle status
7. Press the Controller. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
The setting is stored for the driver profile 1. "My MINI"
currently used.
2. "Vehicle status"
Setting the rotation 3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
The screen of the Head-up Display can be
rotated around its own axis. Information at a glance
Symbols Description
1. "My MINI" "Flat Tire Monitor": status of
2. "System settings" the run-flat tires, refer to
3. "Displays" page 153.
4. "Head-Up Display" "Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-
tus of the Tire Pressure
5. "Rotation"
Monitor TPM, refer to
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set- page 148.
ting is selected.
"Check Control": Check Con-
7. Press the Controller. trol messages are stored in
The setting is stored for the driver profile the background and can be
currently used. displayed on the Control
Display. Displaying stored
Display visibility Check Control messages, re-
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up fer to page 126.
Display is influenced by the following fac-
tors:
– Certain seat positions.
136
Displays CONTROLS
Symbols Description
"Service required": display-
ing service notifications, re-
fer to page 128.
"Teleservice Call": Tele-
service Call.
137
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options Icon Function
Parking lights.
the series. It also describes features and Low beams.
tions or country versions. This also applies Instrument lighting.
observed.
Parking lights, low beams and
roadside parking lights
Overview
General information
Switches in the vehicle
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when standby
state is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended
The light switch element is located next to periods; otherwise, they might drain the
the steering wheel. battery and it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
Icon Function When parking, switch on the one-sided
Bad weather light. roadside parking light, refer to page 139.
Low beams
Automatic headlight control. Position of switch:
Cornering light. The low beams illuminate when standby
state is switched on.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
138
Lights CONTROLS
Canada: roadside parking light 3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"
Concept
5. "Welcome lights"
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
currently used.
Switching on
Pathway lighting
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if
the headlight flasher is switched on after
the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched
off.
Setting the duration

With radio-ready state switched off, press Via the Central Information Display (CID):
the lever either up or down past the resist-
ance point for approx. 2 seconds. 1. "My MINI"
Switching off 3. "Lighting"
Briefly press the lever to the resistance 4. "Exterior lighting"
point in the opposite direction.
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
Welcome lights and pathway The setting is stored for the driver profile
lighting currently used.
Welcome lights Automatic headlight control

General information
Concept
the ambient brightness, individual light The low beams are switched on and off au-
functions may be switched on briefly when tomatically depending on the ambient
the vehicle is unlocked. brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-
light or if there is precipitation.
Position of switch: , General information
Via the Central Information Display (CID): A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon
can cause the lights to be switched on.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" Activating
Position of switch:
139
CONTROLS Lights
The indicator light in the instrument cluster Cornering light

is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
General information
System limits Position of switch:
The automatic headlight control cannot In tight curves, for instance on mountain-
serve as a substitute for your personal judg- ous roads or when turning, an additional,
ment of lighting conditions. cornering light is switched on that lights up
For example, the sensors are unable to de- the inside of the curve when the vehicle is
tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa- moving below a certain speed.
tions, switch the lights on manually. The cornering light is automatically
switched on depending on the steering an-
gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-
Daytime running lights nals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering
lights may be automatically switched on re-
General information gardless of the steering angle.
Switch position:
– ,
– Depending on the national-market ver- Adaptive headlight range con-
sion: trol
The daytime running lights light up when
standby state is switched on. The adaptive headlight range control fea-
Depending on the national-market version: ture balances out acceleration and braking
after switching off the Standby state, the processes as well as the vehicle load condi-
parking lights will illuminate in position tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming
. traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.
In some countries, daytime running lights High-beam Assistant
are mandatory, so it may not be possible to
deactivate the daytime running lights. Concept
Via the Central Information Display (CID): The high-beam Assistant detects other traf-
1. "My MINI" fic participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depend-
2. "Vehicle settings" ing on the traffic situation.
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting" General information
5. Select the desired setting. The high-beam Assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on, whenever the
Settings are stored for the currently used traffic situation allows. In the low speed
vehicle key. range, the high beams are not switched on
by the system.
140
Lights CONTROLS
The system responds to light from oncom- The system is not fully functional in the fol-
ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, lowing situations, and driver intervention
and to ambient lighting, for instance in may be necessary:
towns and cities. – In very unfavorable weather conditions,
The high beams can be switched on and off such as fog or heavy precipitation.
manually at any time. – When detecting poorly-lit road users
such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback
Activating/deactivating riders and wagons; when driving close
to train or ship traffic; or at animal
crossings.
– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-
sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-
scured oncoming traffic on highways.
– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
Position of switch: ered with stickers, etc.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument Fog lights

cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on. Bad weather light
The headlights are automatically switched
between low beams and high beams. Concept
The blue indicator light in the instru- The bad weather light ensures optimized il-
ment cluster lights up when the sys- lumination of the roadway in poor visibility,
tem switches on the high beams. such as fog or rain. The light distribution of
the low beams is adapted to the visibility.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated
when manually switching the high beams Functional requirement
on and off, refer to page 111. The automatic headlight control must be ac-
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, tivated before switching on the bad weather
press the button on the turn signal lever. light.
System limits Switching on/off

The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a Press the button.
substitute for the driver's personal judg-
ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-
uation that require this, therefore switch off The indicator light in the instrument
manually. cluster is illuminated when the bad
weather light is switched on.
141
CONTROLS Lights
Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights on/off

Press the button.
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be To switch off permanently: press the button
switched on to set the brightness. and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Adjusting Switching the reading lights on and

Adjust the brightness with the off manually
thumbwheel. Press the button.
The reading lights are located in the front

next to the interior light.
Ambient light
Interior lights
General information
General information Depending on the equipment version, light-
Depending on the equipment, the interior ing can be adjusted for some lights in the
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour- car's interior.
tesy lights are controlled automatically.
The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting Activating/deactivating
controls brightness of some of these fea- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
tures.
1. "My MINI"
Overview 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
used.
Changing color
1 Interior lights Push the switch forward or back:
2 Reading lights manual color change.
3 Ambient light Press the switch forward or back-
ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds
until the Ambient Light flashes sev-
142
Lights CONTROLS
eral times: automatic color change. Push the

switch again to end color changes.
The colors of the Ambient Light depend on
the respectively set color world, refer to
page 50.
Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the bright-
ness of the ambient light can be adjusted
via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
143
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and In the event of a side impact, the side air-
the front passenger by responding to frontal bag protects the side of the body in the
impacts in which safety belts alone would chest and lap area.
not provide adequate protection.
144
Safety CONTROLS
Head airbag shoulder rests against the backrest

In the event of a side impact, the head air- when crossing the hands and the upper
bag protects the head. body is as far back as possible while still
maintaining a comfortable grip on the
steering wheel.
Ejection Mitigation
– Make sure that the front passenger is
The head airbag system is designed as an
sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her
ejection mitigation countermeasure to re- feet and legs in the floor area and does
duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle not support them on the dashboard.
occupants through side windows during
rollovers or side impact events. – Make sure that occupants keep their
heads away from the side airbag.
Knee airbag – There should be no additional persons,
animals or objects between an airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the
and a person.
event of a frontal impact.
– Dashboard and windshield on the front
Protective effect passenger side must stay clear - do not
attach adhesive labels or coverings and
Airbags are not triggered in every impact do not attach brackets or cables, for in-
situation, for instance in less severe acci- stance for GPS devices or mobile
dents or rear-end collisions. phones.
Information on optimum effect of the – Do not apply adhesive materials to the
airbag cover panels, do not cover them
airbags or modify them in any way.
– Do not use the cover of the front airbag
Warning on the front passenger side as a storage
If the seat position is incorrect or the de- area.
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, – Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions
the airbag system cannot provide protec- or other objects to the front passenger
tion as intended and may cause additional seat that are not specifically suited for
injuries due to triggering. There is a risk seats with integrated side airbags.
of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-
– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
formation on achieving the optimum pro-
jackets, over the backrests.
tective effect of the airbag system.
– Never modify either the individual com-
– Keep a distance from the airbags. ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-
tem. This also applies to steering wheel
– Always grasp the steering wheel on the covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to – Do not remove the airbag system.
keep the risk of injury to your hands or Even when you follow all instructions very
arms as low as possible when the airbag closely, injury from contact with the airbags
is triggered. cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-
– Adjust seat and steering wheel so that tions.
hands can be crossed over the steering
wheel. Select the settings so that the
145
CONTROLS Safety
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to Airbag system malfunctioning
short-term and, in most cases, temporary – Warning light does not come on when
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants. standby state is switched on.
Vehicle modifications for a person with dis- – The warning light lights up continu-
abilities may affect the air bag system; con- ously.
tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-
formation.
Automatic deactivation of the
Warnings and information on the airbags front-seat passenger airbags
are also found on the sun visors.
Concept
Functional readiness of the airbag
The system reads if the front passenger seat
system is occupied by measuring the human body's
resistance.
Safety information
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger's side are activated or deacti-
Warning vated.
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a General information
risk of injury. Do not touch individual Before transporting a child on the front pas-
components. senger seat, refer to the safety information
and instructions for children on the front
passenger seat, see Children.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to fail- Safety information
ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-
ing of the airbag system. In the case of a Warning
malfunction, the airbag system might not
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
trigger as intended despite the accident
function, the system must be able to de-
severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
tect whether a person is sitting in the
ger to life. Have the airbag system
front passenger seat. The entire seat cush-
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-
ion area must be used for this purpose.
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
qualified service center or repair shop.
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.
Correct function
With the standby state switched on, Malfunction of the automatic
the warning light in the instrument deactivation system
cluster lights up briefly, indicating When transporting older children and
the airbag system and belt tensioner are adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may
functional. be deactivated in certain seat positions. In
this case, the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up.
146
Safety CONTROLS
In this case, change the seat position so – The indicator light does not light up
that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac- when, for instance a correctly seated
tivated and the indicator light goes out. person of sufficient size is detected on
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, the seat. The airbags on the front pas-
have the person sit in the rear. senger side are activated.
To enable correct recognition of the occu-
pied seat cushion.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children
– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
seated in a child restraint system, particu-
or other items to the front passenger
larly in child restraint systems required by
seat unless they are specifically deter-
NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-
mined to be safe for use on the front
cle was manufactured. After installing a
passenger seat.
child restraint system, make sure that the
– Do not place any electronic devices on indicator light for the front-seat passenger
the front passenger seat if a child re- airbags lights up. This indicates that the
straint system is to be installed on it. child restraint system has been detected
– Do not place objects under the seat that and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
could press against the seat from below. activated.
– No moisture in or on the seat.
Strength of the driver's and front-
Indicator light for the front-seat seat passenger airbag
passenger airbags The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de-
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function
over the long-term, calibrate the front seats
as soon as a relevant Check Control mes-
sage is displayed. A message also appears
on the Control Display.
The indicator light for the front-seat passen-

Calibrating the front seats
ger airbags indicates the operating state of
the front-seat passenger airbags. Warning
The light indicates whether the airbags are There is a risk of jamming when moving
either activated or deactivated. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
– The indicator light lights area of movement of the seat is clear prior
up when a child is properly to any adjustment.
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is An appropriate Check Control message is
empty. The airbags on the displayed.
front passenger side are
not activated.
147
CONTROLS Safety
1. Move the respective seat all the way for- – After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
ward. justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed.
2. Move the respective seat forward again.
The seat moves forward briefly. – Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-
tion.
Status display
The calibration procedure is completed Current status
when the Check Control message disap-
pears. The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-
If the message continues to be displayed, tem is active.
repeat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re-
peat calibration, have the system checked 1. "My MINI"
as soon as possible. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure General information
in the four mounted tires. The system warns
Tire and system status are indicated by the
you if there is a significant loss of pressure
color of the wheels and a text message on
in one or more tires.
the Control Display.
General information All wheels green
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire System is active and will issue a warning re-
inflation pressure and, depending on the lated to the tire inflation pressures stored
model, the tire temperature. during the last reset.
Further information and instructions on us-
ing the system can also be found under Tire One to four yellow wheels
inflation pressure, refer to page 239.
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
The following conditions must be met for Gray wheels
the system; otherwise, reliable message of a It may not be possible to identify tire infla-
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: tion pressure losses.
– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re- Possible causes:
set was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure. – Malfunction.
– The system is being reset.
148
Safety CONTROLS
Additional information Safety information

The status control display additionally
shows the current tire inflation pressures. Warning
The values shown are instantaneous meas-
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
urements and may vary depending on driv-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
ing style or weather conditions.
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
Resetting the system stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not
Via the Central Information Display (CID): continue driving if the vehicle is equipped
with normal tires. Follow the information
1. "My MINI"
on run-flat tires and continued driving
2. "Vehicle status" with these tires.
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not If a tire inflation pressure check is
drive off. required
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset". Message
6. Drive away. A icon with a Check Control message ap-
The wheels are displayed in gray and the pears on the Control Display.
following is displayed "Resetting Tire Icon Possible cause
Pressure Monitor…".
The system has detected a wheel
After a travel time of several minutes, the change, but no reset was done.
set tire inflation pressures are accepted as
reference values. The resetting process is No reset was performed for the
completed automatically while driving. system. The system issues a warn-
ing based on the tire inflation
After successful completion of the reset, the pressures stored during the last
tires appear in green on the Control Display reset.
and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label
for recommended pressures." is displayed. Inflation was not carried out ac-
cording to specifications.
You may interrupt this trip at any time.
When you continue the reset resumes auto- The tire inflation pressure has
matically. fallen below the level of the last
reset.
Messages
Measure
General information 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the needed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be 2. Reset the system.
switched on.
149
CONTROLS Safety
If the tire inflation pressure is too low Icon Possible cause
Message There is a flat tire or a major loss

in tire inflation pressure.
A yellow warning light is illuminated
No reset was performed for the
in the instrument cluster.
system. The system issues a warn-
ing based on the tire inflation
In addition, a icon with a Check Control
pressures stored during the last
message appears on the Control Display.
reset.
Icon Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure Measure
loss. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
No reset was performed for the Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
system. The system issues a warn- neuvers.
ing based on the tire inflation 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
pressures stored during the last normal tires or run-flat tires.
reset. Run-flat tires, refer to page 245, are la-
beled with a circular icon containing the
Measure letters RSC marked on the tire's side-
1. Reduce your speed and drive moder- wall.
ately. Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h. Actions in the event of a flat tire
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire infla- Normal tires
tion pressure in all four tires, if neces- 1. Identify the damaged tire.
sary. To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
3. Reset the system. sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If there is a significant loss of tire If the tire inflation pressure in all four
inflation pressure tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
Message case, perform the reset.
A yellow warning light is illuminated If the tire inflation pressure in all four
in the instrument cluster. tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
In addition, a icon with the affected tire ap- case, initialize the system.
pears in a Check Control message on the If identification of flat tire damage is
Control Display. not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
150
Safety CONTROLS
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire ing distance may be less but may also be
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. more if an economical driving style is used.
In this case, have the electronics checked If the vehicle is loaded with an average
and replaced at the next opportunity. weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to
Run-flat tires drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Safety information Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
Warning handle differently, potentially leading to
The vehicle handles differently when a conditions such as the following:
run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire – Greater likelihood of swerving off
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- course.
ity when braking, braking distances are – Longer braking distances.
longer and the self-steering properties will
– Changed self-steering properties.
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
50 mph/80 km/h. steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Maximum speed Final tire failure

You may continue driving with a damaged Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
Continued driving with a flat tire the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: dent.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
neuvers. service center or another qualified service
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h. System limits
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity. Temperature
If the tire inflation pressure in all four The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tire's temperature.
tor may not have been reset. In this
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase
case, perform the reset.
the tire's temperature, thus increasing the
tire inflation pressure.
Possible driving distance with a
depressurized tire The tire inflation pressure is reduced when
the tire temperature falls again.
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the These circumstances may cause a warning
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road when temperatures fall very sharply.
conditions, outside temperature. The driv-
151
CONTROLS Safety
Sudden tire pressure loss size than the size indicated on the vehicle
The system cannot indicate sudden serious placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
tire damage caused by external circumstan- should determine the proper tire inflation
ces. pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped
Failure performing a reset with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
The system does not function properly if a telltale when one or more of your tires is
reset has not been carried out, for instance significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
a flat tire is reported though tire inflation when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
pressures are correct. nates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
Malfunction proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
The yellow warning light flashes and under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
is then illuminated continuously. A heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-
Check Control message is displayed. tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
It may not be possible to identify tire pres- tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-
sure losses. dling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
Examples and recommendations in the fol-
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
lowing situations:
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics if under-inflation has not reached the level
is mounted: have it checked by a deal- to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
er’s service center or another qualified pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
service center or repair shop as needed. equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-
– Malfunction: have system checked by a tor to indicate when the system is not oper-
dealer’s service center or another quali- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
fied service center or repair shop. cator is combined with the low tire pressure
– The system was unable to complete the telltale. When the system detects a mal-
reset. Perform a system reset again. function, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain contin-
– Interference caused by systems or devi- uously illuminated. This sequence will
ces with the same radio frequency: after continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
leaving the area of the interference, the as long as the malfunction exists. When the
system automatically becomes active malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
again. system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
Declaration according to NHTSA/ functions may occur for a variety of rea-
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring sons, including the installation of replace-
System ment or alternate tires or wheels on the
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
should be checked monthly when cold and tioning properly. Always check the TPMS
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- malfunction telltale after replacing one or
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- sure that the replacement or alternate tires
bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
152
Safety CONTROLS
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to Initialization required

function properly.
An initialization must be performed in the
following situations:
Flat Tire Monitor FTM – After the tire inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
– After a tire or wheel replacement.
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure Performing initialization
loss on the basis of rotation speed differen-
When initializing, the set tire inflation
ces between the individual wheels while
pressures serve as reference values in order
driving.
to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, by confirming the tire inflation pressures.
the diameter and therefore the rotational
Do not initialize the system when driving
speed of the corresponding wheel changes.
with tire chains.
The difference will be detected and reported
as a flat tire. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
The system does not measure the actual in- 1. "My MINI"
flation pressure in the tires. 2. "Vehicle status"
Functional requirements 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The following conditions must be met for 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
the system; otherwise, reliable message of a drive off.
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform
– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini- reset".
tialization was performed with the cor- 6. Drive away.
rect tire inflation pressure. The initialization is completed while driv-
– After the tire pressure was adjusted to a ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
new value, an initialization was per- The initialization automatically continues
formed. when driving continues.
Status display Messages
The current status of the flat tire monitor
can be displayed, for instance whether the General information
RPA is active.
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Stability Control is switched on, if needed.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
153
CONTROLS Safety
Safety information To do this, check the tire inflation pres-

sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
Warning
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
A damaged regular tire with low or miss- tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han- tor may not have been reset. In this
dling, such as steering and braking re- case, perform the reset.
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not If the tire inflation pressure in all four
continue driving if the vehicle is equipped tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
with normal tires. Follow the information may not have been initialized. In this
on run-flat tires and continued driving case, initialize the system.
with these tires. If identification of flat tire damage is
not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
Indication of a flat tire ice center or repair shop.
A yellow warning light is illuminated 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
in the instrument cluster. kit or by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
In addition, a icon with a Check Control kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
message appears on the Control Display. In this case, have the electronics checked
Icon Possible cause and replaced at the next opportunity.
There is a flat tire or a major loss Run-flat tires

in tire inflation pressure.
Safety information
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Warning
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- The vehicle handles differently when a
neuvers. run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
ity when braking, braking distances are
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 245, are la- change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
beled with a circular icon containing the moderately and do not exceed a speed of
letters RSC marked on the tire's side- 50 mph/80 km/h.
wall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged
Normal tires tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
154
Safety CONTROLS
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
neuvers. service center or another qualified service
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
System limits
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
The system could be delayed or malfunction
four tires at the next opportunity.
in the following situations:
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
– A natural, even tire inflation pressure
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
loss in all four tires will not be recog-
may not have been initialized. In this
nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation
case, initialize the system.
pressure regularly.
Possible driving distance with a – Sudden serious tire damage caused by
depressurized tire external circumstances cannot be recog-
nized in advance.
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the – When the system has not been initial-
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road ized.
conditions, outside temperature. The driv- – When driving on a snowy or slippery
ing distance may be less but may also be road surface.
more if an economical driving style is used. – Sporty driving style: spinning traction
If the vehicle is loaded with an average wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-
weight and used under favorable conditions, ing).
the distance for which it may be safe to – When driving with tire chains.
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Intelligent Safety
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to
conditions such as the following: Concept
– Greater likelihood of swerving off Intelligent Safety enables central operation
course. of the driver assistance systems.
– Longer braking distances. The intelligent safety systems can help pre-
vent an imminent collision.
– Changed self-steering properties.
– Forward Collision Warning with city
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
collision mitigation, refer to page 156.
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes. – Pedestrian Collision Warning with City
Collision Mitigation, refer to page 159.
Final tire failure – Lane departure warning, refer to
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can page 162.
indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
155
CONTROLS Safety
Safety information Intelligent Safety systems activate accord-

ing to the last setting.
Warning Press button briefly:
The system cannot serve as a substitute – The menu for the Intelligent
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- Safety system is displayed. The
sessing visibility and traffic situation. systems are individually
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving switched off according to their
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic respective settings.
closely and actively intervene where ap- – LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
propriate. tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
Warning currently in use.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg- Press button again:
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not – All Intelligent Safety systems
issue warnings or reactions, or these may are switched on.
be issued late or in a manner that is not – The LED lights up green.
consistent with their normal use. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to Hold down button:
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely – All Intelligent Safety systems
and actively intervene where appropriate. are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Overview
Button in the vehicle Forward Collision Warning
with city light braking func-
tion
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In
the event of an accident, the system may re-
duce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an im-
Intelligent Safety button minent collision and activates brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
The Brake Intervention function activates
Switching on/off and applies the brakes with limited force
and duration.
Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto-
matically active after every departure. Some A camera at the base of the interior mirror
controls the system.
156
Safety CONTROLS
The Forward Collision Warning is available closely and actively intervene where ap-
even if cruise control has been deactivated. propriate.
With the vehicle approaching another vehi-
cle intentionally, the Forward Collision
Warning and brake intervention are delayed Warning
in order to avoid false system reactions. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
General information ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
The system warns at two levels of an immi- issue warnings or reactions, or these may
nent danger of collision at speeds from ap- be issued late or in a manner that is not
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn- consistent with their normal use. There is
ings may vary with the current driving a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
situation. traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
If necessary, a brake intervention will oc- and actively intervene where appropriate.
cur. Depending on the equipment and na-
tional-market version, the brake interven-
tion will occur up to approx.
Overview
35 mph/60 km/h or up to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h. Button in the vehicle
Detection range
Intelligent Safety button
Objects that the system can detect are

taken into account. Camera
Safety information
Warning
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
157
CONTROLS Safety
Keep the windshield in front of the interior The selected warning time is stored for the
mirror clean and clear. driver profile currently in use.
Switching on/off Warning with braking function
Switching on automatically Display

A warning symbol appears in the instru-
The system is automatically active when the
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a
vehicle is turned on.
collision with a detected vehicle is immi-
nent.
Switching on/off manually
Icon Measure
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent Icon lights up red: prewarning.
Safety system is displayed. The Brake and increase distance.
systems are individually
switched off according to their Symbol flashes red and an acous-
respective settings. tic signal sounds: acute warning.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec- Brake and make an evasive ma-
tive to their individual settings. neuver, if necessary.
ual settings are stored for the driver profile Prewarning
currently in use. This warning is provided, for instance when
there is impending danger of a collision or
Press button again: the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
– All Intelligent Safety systems small.
are switched on. If a prewarning is provided, respond by
– The LED lights up green. braking as warranted.
Hold down button: Acute warning with braking function

– All Intelligent Safety systems An acute warning is displayed when there
are switched off. is an imminent danger of collision due to
– The LED goes out. the vehicle approaching another object at a
high speed.
Setting the warning time The driver must intervene actively when
there is an acute warning. If necessary, the
The warning time can be set via the Central driver is assisted by a minor automatic
Information Display (CID). brake intervention in a possible risk of colli-
1. "My MINI" sion.
2. "Vehicle settings" Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
158
Safety CONTROLS
Brake intervention – Slow moving vehicles when you ap-

The warning prompts the driver to inter- proach them at high speed.
vene. While a warning is active, the maxi- – Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front
mum braking force is used when the brake of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
is applied. In order to activate the Brake As- – Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-
sistant function, you must apply the brakes ance.
quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of
– Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
collision, the system may assist with brak-
ing. When the vehicle is traveling at a low
speed, the vehicle may come to a complete
Functional limitations
stop. The system may be limited in the following
situations:
The brake intervention can be interrupted
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
actively moving the steering wheel. fall.
The system’s ability to detect objects may – In tight curves.
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to – If the field of view of the camera or the
the information in this Owner’s Manual re- windshield is dirty or covered.
garding the limitations of the system and – If the driving stability control systems
actively intervene as warranted. are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
– Up to 10 seconds after activating the
System limits drive-ready state via the Start/Stop but-
ton.
Safety information
Warning – If there are constant blinding effects be-
The system is designed to operate in cer- cause of oncoming light, for instance
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to from the sun low in the sky.
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of Warning sensitivity
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
The more sensitive the warning settings
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
are, the more warnings are displayed.
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
Therefore, there may also be an excess of
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
premature or unjustified warnings and reac-
tion and limitations.
tions.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Pedestrian Collision Warning
Thus, a system reaction might not come or with City Collision Mitigation
might come late.
The following situations may not be de- Concept
tected, for example: The system may prevent some accidents
with pedestrians.
159
CONTROLS Safety
When driving at city speeds, the system Safety information

will issue a warning if there is imminent
risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-
port this with a light braking function. Warning
The camera at the base of the interior mir- The system cannot serve as a substitute
ror controls the system. for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
General information There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
In sufficiently bright conditions, the system closely and actively intervene where ap-
issues a warning of a possible risk of colli- propriate.
sion with pedestrians in the speed range
from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h
Warning
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
Detection range
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
The detection area in front of the vehicle is Button in the vehicle

divided into two areas:
– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of
the vehicle.
– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
cated within the central area. A warning is
issued about pedestrians who are located
within the extended area only if they are
moving in the direction of the central area. Intelligent Safety button
160
Safety CONTROLS
Camera – The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function

Display
If a collision with a detected person is im-
minent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis-
play.
The red icon is displayed and a sig-
The camera is installed near the interior nal sounds.
mirror.
Intervene immediately by braking or
Keep the windshield in front of the interior make an evasive maneuver.
Brake intervention
Switching on/off
The warning prompts the driver to inter-
vene. While a warning is active, the maxi-
Switching on automatically mum braking force is used when the brake
The system is automatically active when the is applied. In order to activate the Brake As-
vehicle is turned on. sistant function, you must apply the brakes
quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of
Switching on/off manually collision, the system may assist with brak-
Press button briefly: ing. When the vehicle is traveling at a low
speed, the vehicle may come to a complete
– The menu for the Intelligent stop.
Safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually The brake intervention can be interrupted
switched off according to their by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by
respective settings. actively moving the steering wheel.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec- The system’s ability to detect objects may
tive to their individual settings. be limited in some circumstances. Refer to
the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ- garding the limitations of the system and
ual settings are stored for the driver profile actively intervene as warranted.
currently in use.
Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:

are switched off.
161
CONTROLS Safety
System limits – Up to 10 seconds after activating the

drive-ready state via the Start/Stop but-
Safety information ton.
Warning
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
The system is designed to operate in cer-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
from the sun low in the sky.
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of – When it is dark outside.
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
information in this Owner’s Manual re- Lane departure warning
tion and limitations. Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the
Detection range vehicle on roads with lane markings is
The detection potential of the camera is lim- about to leave the lane.
ited.
General information
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be
issued late. Depending on the country version, the sys-
tem issues a warning at speeds between
The following situations may not be de-
35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.
tected, for example:
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
– Partially covered pedestrians.
wheel vibration. The time of the warning
– Pedestrians that are not detected as may vary depending on the current driving
such because of the viewing angle or situation.
contour.
The system does not provide a warning if
– Pedestrians outside of the detection the turn signal is set before leaving the
range. lane.
– Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm. Safety information
Functional limitations
Warning
The system may be limited or may not be
available in the following situations: The system cannot serve as a substitute
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- sessing road and traffic situation. There is
fall. a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
– In tight curves. traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
– If the field of view of the camera or the and actively intervene where appropriate.
windshield is dirty or covered. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response
to a warning.
– If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
162
Safety CONTROLS
Switching on/off
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a Switching on automatically
substitute for the driver’s personal judg- The lane departure warning is automatically
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not activated after departure, if the function
issue warnings or reactions, or these may was switched on the last time drive-ready
be issued late or in a manner that is not state was switched off.
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to Switching on/off manually
and actively intervene where appropriate. Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent
Safety system is displayed. The
Overview systems are individually
switched off according to their
Button in the vehicle respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
currently in use.
Press button again:

are switched on.
Intelligent Safety button – The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:

Camera – All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Display in the instrument cluster

The icon illuminates green: at least
one lane marking was detected and
warnings can be issued.
The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
163
CONTROLS Safety
Issued warning – When lane markings are covered in

snow, ice, dirt or water.
If you leave the lane – In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking – When lane markings are covered by ob-
has been detected, the steering wheel vi- jects.
brates. – When driving very close to the vehicle
If the turn signal is switched on before in front of you.
changing the lane, a warning is not issued. – When driving toward bright lights.
End of warning terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
The warning is canceled in the following ered with stickers, etc.
situations: – During calibration of the camera imme-
– Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. diately after vehicle delivery.
– When returning to your own lane.
– When braking hard.
– When using the turn signal. Manual Speed Limiter
System limits Concept

The system can be used to set a speed limit,
Safety information for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex-
ceeding speed limits.
Warning
General information
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to The system can limit the speed, starting at a
conditions or other factors, the system value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can
may not respond. There may be a risk of be driven at any speed below the set speed
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- limit.
information in this Owner’s Manual re- Exceeding the speed limit
garding the scope of the system’s opera- When necessary, the speed limit can be in-
tion and limitations. tentionally overcome by stepping on the
gas.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set
Functional limitations speed limit, a warning is issued.
The system may be limited in the following
situations: No brake intervention
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow- If the set speed limit is reached or uninten-
fall. tionally exceeded, such as when driving
– In the event of missing, worn, poorly downhill, the vehicle is not actively braked.
visible, merging, diverging, or multiple When the speed limit is set during a trip to
lane markings such as in construction a value below the driving speed, the vehicle
areas.
164
Safety CONTROLS
coasts until its driving speed drops below – On activation of Dynamic Traction Con-
the set speed limit. trol DTC or deactivation of DSC.
The displays go out.
Overview
Changing the speed limit
Steering wheel buttons, left or button: press up or down repeat-
edly until the desired speed limit is set.
Button Function
– or button: each time it is pressed
System on/off. to the resistance point, the speed limit
increases or decreases by 1 mph,
Increase the speed limit. 1 km/h.
Reduce the speed limit. past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Operation When the speed limit is set during a trip to
a value below the current speed, the vehicle
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
Switching on
Press the button on the steering Exceeding the speed limit
wheel. The speed limit can be exceeded intention-
The current speed is accepted as the speed ally. There is no acoustic warning in this
limit. case.
If the system is switched on while the vehi- Press the accelerator pedal all the way down
cle is stationary or driving at low speeds, to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit. When the vehicle speed drops below the set
The set speed is displayed under the LIMIT speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-
or LIM indicator. vated.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on as Warning when the speed limit is
well, if needed. exceeded
Switching off Visual warning

Press the button on the steering If the set speed limit is exceeded, the LIMIT
wheel. or LIM indicator flashes while the vehicle
speed is greater than the speed limit.
The system switches off automatically in
the following situations, for example: Acoustic warning
– When shifting into reverse gear. – If the speed limit is exceeded uninten-
– When drive-ready state is switched off. tionally, a signal sounds.
– When cruise control is switched on.
165
CONTROLS Safety
– When the speed limit is reduced to be- tected or not be detected in time. There is
low the vehicle speed while driving, a a risk of accident. Make sure that the
signal sounds after approx. 30 seconds. driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
– When the speed limit is intentionally style to traffic conditions.
exceeded by stepping on the accelerator
pedal all the way down, there is no sig-
nal. Function
The system is switched on each time the en-
Displays in the instrument cluster gine is started and cannot be switched off.
The desired speed is displayed After travel has begun, the system monitors
under the LIM indicator. certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so
that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be
detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria
into account:
– The indicator does not light up: the sys-
tem is switched off. – Personal driving style, for instance
steering behavior.
– The indicator lights up green: the sys-
tem is active. – Driving conditions, for instance time,
length of trip.
– Display flashes green: set speed limit ex-
ceeded. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,
the system is active and can display a rec-
Displays in the Head-up Display ommendation to take a break.
The information from the Speed Limiter can Break recommendation
also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the Control Dis-
Fatigue alert play with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is dis-
Concept played only once during an uninterrupted
The system can detect decreasing alertness trip.
or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto- After a break, another recommendation to
nous trips, for instance on highways. In this take a break cannot be displayed until after
situation, it is recommended that the driver approximately 45 minutes.
takes a break.
System limits
Safety information
The function may be limited in the follow-
ing situations and may issue an incorrect
Warning warning or no warning at all:
The system cannot serve as a substitute – When the time is set incorrectly.
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- – When the vehicle speed is mainly below
sessing one's physical state. An increasing about 43 mph/70 km/h.
lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-
166
Safety CONTROLS
– With a sporty driving style, such as dur- Interrupting automatic braking

ing rapid acceleration or when corner- It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
ing fast. braking in certain situations, for instance
– In active driving situations, such as for an evasive maneuver.
when changing lanes frequently. Interrupt automatic braking:
– When the road surface is poor. – By pressing the brake pedal.
– In the event of strong side winds. – By pressing the accelerator pedal.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-
ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the
case of a break during longer trips on high-
ways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically
without intervention by the driver in cer-
tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a
further collision and the consequences
thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against
rolling.
Harder vehicle braking

In certain situations, it can be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
the Brake Assistant allows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. For a brief period, the braking pres-
sure will be higher than the braking pres-
sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-
ing function. This interrupts automatic
braking.
167
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options Energy recovery
This chapter describes all standard, country- General information
specific and optional features offered with In the event of danger, such as with locked
the series. It also describes features and wheels, energy recovery is reduced in order
functions that are not necessarily available to prevent unstable driving situations.
to safety-related functions and systems. Safety information
the applicable laws and regulations must be Warning
observed. Without energy recovery, there is no brak-
ing power of the electric motor available.
The vehicle could roll further than antici-
Antilock Braking System ABS pated. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during traffic closely and actively intervene
braking. where appropriate.
The vehicle maintains its steering power
even during full brake applications, which
increases the active safety.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
ABS is ready when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps
Brake assistant to keep the vehicle on a steady course by
reducing engine speed and by applying
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys- brake intervention to the individual wheels.
tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak-
ing capability to the furthest possible ex- General information
tent. It reduces the braking distance to a DSC detects the following unstable driving
minimum during an emergency stop. This conditions, for instance:
system utilizes all of the capabilities pro- – Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-
vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS. ing.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake – Loss of traction of the front wheels,
pedal for the duration of the emergency which can lead to understeering.
stop.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 169, is a version of the DSC where
drive power is optimized.
168
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Safety information Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not
Warning longer than approx. 10 seconds, un-
The system cannot serve as a substitute til the indicator light for DSC OFF
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- lights up in the instrument cluster and dis-
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the plays DSC OFF.
limits of the system, it cannot independ- DSC is switched off.
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to Activating DSC
and actively intervene where appropriate. Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for in- Indicator/warning lights
stance with roof-mounted luggage rack, When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher, played in the instrument cluster.
which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-
ping in critical driving situations. There The indicator light lights up: DSC is
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage deactivated.
to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy-
namic Stability Control when driving with
roof load. Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-
tion occurs in the following situations:
Indicator/warning lights – The vehicle has a flat tire.
The indicator light flashes: DSC con- – When activating cruise control in the
trols the drive and braking forces. TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DTC Dynamic Traction Con-
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF trol
General information Concept
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-
is reduced during acceleration and when ity Control where drive power is optimized.
driving in curves. The system ensures maximum drive power
To increase driving stability, activate DSC on unusual road conditions, for instance
again as soon as possible. unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road
surfaces, but with somewhat limited driving
stability.
169
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has MINI Driving Modes switch
maximum traction. Driving stability is lim-
ited during acceleration and when driving
in curves. Concept
Drive carefully. The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to
fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.
You may find it useful to briefly activate
DTC under the following special circum- Choose between four different programs.
stances: Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch
– When driving in slush or on uncleared, will activate the particular program.
snow-covered roads.
– When driving off from deep snow or Operating the programs
loose ground.
Switch Program
– When driving with tire chains.
SPORT
Deactivating/activating DTC MID
Dynamic Traction Control GREEN
GREEN+
Activating DTC
Press the button. MID
TRACTION is displayed in the in- MID provides balanced tuning.
strument cluster and the indicator light for
DSC OFF lights up. With each starting operation, MID is acti-
vated using the Start/Stop button.
Deactivating DTC GREEN
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica- Concept
tor light go out. GREEN provides consumption reducing tun-
ing for increased range.
Activating GREEN
Performance Control
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up-
ward or downward until GREEN is displayed
Performance Control enhances the agility of in the instrument cluster.
the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are Configuring GREEN
braked individually when a sporty driving
style is used. Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
170
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
This configuration is retrieved when Displays

GREEN is activated.
Program selection
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
Pressing the MINI Driving
1. "My MINI" Modes switch displays a list of
2. "Vehicle settings" programs, which can be se-
3. If necessary, "Driving mode" lected.
5. Select the desired setting. Selected program
This configuration is retrieved when The instrument cluster dis-
GREEN is activated. plays the selected program.
GREEN+
Concept
GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi-
mize range. Drive-off assistant
During the activation, some comfort func-
tions will also be limited or deactivated. Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill
Activating GREEN+
grades. The parking brake is not required.
ward or downward until GREEN+ is dis- Driving off with the drive-off
played in the instrument cluster.
assistant
SPORT 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
Concept 2. Release the foot brake and drive off
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain without delay.
for greater driving agility. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle
is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Activating SPORT
ward or downward until SPORT is displayed Servotronic
in the instrument cluster.
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
Configuring driving program steering function.
Settings can be made for the following driv- The system provides the steering force with
ing programs in Drive mode: more support at low speeds than at higher
– GREEN, refer to page 170. ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-
stance, and makes steering firmer when
driving at faster speeds.
171
Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-

cording to the driving program, so that a
firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering
response is conveyed.
172
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Depending on the settings, the cruise con-
trol settings may change under certain con-
ditions.
Safety information
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Warning
tions or country versions. This also applies The system cannot serve as a substitute
to safety-related functions and systems. for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
When using these functions and systems, sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
the applicable laws and regulations must be limits of the system, it cannot independ-
observed. ently react to all traffic situations. There is
Camera-based cruise control and actively intervene where appropriate.
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a Warning
distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-
using the buttons on the steering wheel. justed or called up by mistake. There is a
The system maintains the desired speed on risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed
clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic
brakes automatically. closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-
tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so
that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is
maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as Warning
the given situation allows. Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-
The distance can be adjusted in several ferences to other vehicles, for instance in
steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the the following situations:
respective speed. – When fast approaching a slowly mov-
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, ing vehicle.
and then proceeds to drive again within a – Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
brief period, the system is able to detect lane.
this within the given system limits. – When fast approaching standing ve-
hicles.
General information There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
A camera on the interior mirror is used to Watch traffic closely and actively inter-
detect vehicles driving ahead. vene where appropriate.
173
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Camera
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill The camera is installed near the interior
slope, turn the front wheels in the di- mirror.
rection of the curb. Keep the windshield in front of the interior
– On uphill grades or on a downhill mirror clean and clear.
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
The system is best used on well-constructed
Overview roads.
The system is functional at speeds begin-
Buttons on the steering wheel ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Button Function The system can also be activated when sta-
tionary.
Cruise control on/off, refer to The max. speed that can be set is
page 174. 85 mph/140 km/h.
Pause cruise control, refer to If distance control is switched off, refer to
page 174. page 176, higher desired speeds can be se-
Continue cruise control with the lected as well.
last setting, refer to page 176.
Switching on/off and interrupting
Reduce distance, refer to
page 176. cruise control
Increase the distance, refer to Switching on
page 176.
Increase speed, refer to wheel.
page 175.
Display in the instrument
Reduce speed, refer to page 175.
cluster lights up. The current
speed is adopted as desired
speed and displayed with icon.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's
series, optional features and country speci-
fications. Cruise control is active and maintains the
set speed.
174
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched When the system is switched on, the cur-
on, if necessary. rent speed is maintained and stored as the
desired speed.
Switching off Instrument cluster with en-
To switch off the system while standing, hanced features:
step on brake pedal at the same time. The stored speed is displayed.
wheel.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
The displays go out. The stored desired on, if necessary.
speed is deleted.
Changing the speed
Interrupting manually
or button: press until the desired
Press the button on the steering speed is set.
wheel. If active, the displayed speed is stored and
When canceling at a standstill, step on the vehicle reaches the stored speed when
brake pedal at the same time. the road is clear.
Interrupting automatically to the point of resistance, the desired
The system is automatically interrupted in speed increases or decreases by approx.
the following situations: 1 mph/1 km/h.
– When the driver applies the brakes. – or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
– When selector lever position D is disen- speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
gaged. 10 km/h.
– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- or button: hold down to repeat the
vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control action.
is deactivated.
– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter- Adjusting the distance
venes.
– If the detection range of the camera is Safety information
impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy
precipitation or glare effects from the
sun. Warning
– After a stationary period of approx. The system cannot serve as a substitute
3 seconds when the vehicle has been for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to
braked to a stop by the system. the system limits, braking can be late.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Be aware to the traffic
Setting the speed situation at all times. Adjust the distance
to the traffic and weather conditions and
Maintaining/storing the speed maintain the prescribed safety distance,
Press or button in the interrupted possibly by braking.
state.
175
Reduce distance Switching distance control on/off

Press the button repeatedly until
the desired distance is set. Safety information
Increase the distance Warning

The system does not react to traffic driv-
Press the button repeatedly until
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains
the desired distance is set.
the stored speed. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ad-
Continuing cruise control just the desired speed to the traffic condi-
tions and brake as needed.
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be contin- Switching distance control off
ued by calling up the stored speed.
Distance control can be switched off and on
Make sure that the difference between cur- when driving with cruise control activated.
rent speed and stored speed is not too large
before calling up the stored speed. Other- Press and hold this button.
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
may occur. Or:
In the following cases, the stored speed Press and hold this button.
value is deleted and cannot be called up
again:
– When the system is switched off. The indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up.
– When drive-ready state is switched off.
To switch distance control back on, press
Calling up the stored speed and one of the two buttons again briefly.
distance
After changing over distance control, a
Press the button with the system in- Check Control message is displayed.
terrupted. Cruise control is contin-
ued with the stored values. The in- Displays in the instrument cluster
strument cluster briefly displays the
selected distance. Desired speed and stored speed
Instrument cluster with en-
hanced features:
– Display lights up green:
system is active, the dis-
play indicates the desired
speed.
– Speed value is illuminated gray: system
is interrupted.
– No display: system is switched off.
176
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that The conditions are not adequate for the sys-
the conditions necessary for operation are tem to work.
not currently fulfilled. The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
Distance to vehicle ahead of you pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Distance display
Icon flashes red and a signal sounds:
Distance 1 Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
Distance 2 System interrupted without detected
vehicle.
Distance 3 System interrupted with detected ve-
hicle.
Distance 4
This value is set automatically af- Displays in the Head-up Display
ter the system is switched on. The information from Active Cruise Control
can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-
Detected vehicle play.
Instrument cluster with en-
hanced features: System limits
Vehicle symbol is displayed: a Detection range
vehicle has been detected
ahead of you.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle

has driven away.
ACC does not accelerate. To acceler-
ate, activate ACC as follows:
– By briefly pressing the accelerator
pedal.
– By pressing the RES CNCL button.
The detection capacity of the system and
– By pressing the or button. the automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might
Indicator/warning lights not be detected.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: Deceleration
Vehicle symbol flashes. The system does not decelerate in the fol-
lowing situations:
177
– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly Cornering

slow-moving road users.
– For red traffic lights.
– For cross traffic.
– For oncoming traffic.
– Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-
ing lighting at night.
Merging vehicles
When the desired speed is too high for a
curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Be-
cause curves may not be anticipated in ad-
vance, drive into a curve at an appropriate
speed.
The system has a limited detection range.
Situations can arise in tight curves where a
vehicle driving ahead will not be detected
or will be detected very late.
A vehicle driving in front of you is not de-
tected until it is completely within the same
lane as your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
merges into your lane, the system may not
be able to automatically restore the selected
distance. It may not be possible to restore
the selected distance in certain situations,
including if you are driving significantly
faster than vehicles driving ahead of you,
for instance when rapidly approaching a When you approach a curve the system may
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
is reliably detected, the system requests to the bend of the curve. If the system de-
that the driver intervene by braking and celerates you may compensate it by briefly
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed. accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under
unfavorable weather or light conditions:
– Poorer vehicle recognition.
– Short-term interruptions for vehicles
that are already recognized.
178
Examples of unfavorable weather or light Cruise control

conditions:
– Wet conditions.
Concept
– Snowfall.
Using this system, a desired speed can be
– Slush. adjusted using the buttons on the steering
– Fog. wheel. The system maintains the desired
– Glare. speed. The system accelerates and brakes
automatically as needed.
Drive attentively, and react to the current
traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-
tively, for instance by braking, steering or General information
evading. The system is functional at speeds begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Engine power Depending on the settings, the cruise con-
The desired speed may not be maintained trol settings may change under certain con-
on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi- ditions.
cient.
Safety information
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the Warning
system fails or was automatically deacti- The system cannot serve as a substitute
vated. for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
The system may be limited in the following sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
situations: limits of the system, it cannot independ-
– When an object was not correctly de- ently react to all traffic situations. There is
tected. a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the Warning
windshield is dirty or covered.
The use of the system can lead to an in-
– When driving toward bright lights. creased risk of accidents in the following
– Up to 20 seconds after drive-ready state situations, for instance:
is switched on via the Start/Stop button. – On winding roads.
– During calibration of the camera imme- – In heavy traffic.
– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or
wet conditions, or on a loose road
surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
179
Overview Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on
Buttons on the steering wheel the steering wheel.
Button Function
Interrupting automatically
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 180. The system is automatically interrupted in
the following situations:
Pause cruise control, refer to – When the driver applies the brakes.
page 180.
– When selector lever position D is disen-
Continue cruise control with the gaged.
last setting, refer to page 181.
– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
Increase speed, refer to vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
page 180. is deactivated.
Reduce speed, refer to page 180. – If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
Switching on/off and interrupting Setting the speed

cruise control
Maintaining/storing the speed
Switching on Press or button in the interrupted
state.
wheel. When the system is switched on, the cur-
rent speed is maintained and stored as the
Display in the instrument desired speed.
cluster lights up. The current The stored speed is displayed in the instru-
speed is adopted as the speed ment cluster.
limit. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
Cruise control is active and maintains the
set speed. Changing the speed
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched or button: press until the desired
on, if necessary. speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
Switching off the vehicle reaches the stored speed when
Press the button on the steering the road is clear.
wheel. – or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired
The displays go out. The stored desired speed increases or decreases by approx.
speed is deleted. 1 mph/1 km/h.
past the resistance point, the desired
180
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ Desired speed and stored speed

10 km/h.
The desired speed is displayed
– or button: press button to resist- together with the symbol.
ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates without pressure on – Display lights up green:
the accelerator pedal. After the button is system is active, the dis-
released, the vehicle maintains its final play indicates the desired
speed.
speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to – Display lights up gray: system is inter-
accelerate more rapidly. rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
Continuing cruise control – No display: system is switched off.
General information System limits

An interrupted cruise control can be contin-
ued by calling up the stored speed. Engine power
Make sure that the difference between cur- The desired speed is also maintained down-
rent speed and stored speed is not too large hill, but may not be maintained on uphill
before calling up the stored speed. Other- grades if engine power is insufficient.
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
may occur.
Calling up the stored speed

PDC Park Distance Control
Press the button on the steering Concept
wheel.
PDC is a support when parking. The system
The stored speed is reached again and main- detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-
tained. hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in
front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-
Displays in the instrument cluster jects that you are approaching slowly are in-
dicated by signal tones and a visual display.
Indicator light
General information
The indicator in the instru-
ment cluster lights up: the sys- The ultrasound sensors for measuring the
tem is switched on. distances are located in the bumpers.
The range, depending on obstacles and en-
vironmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-
lowing situations:
– By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the object.
181
– By the rear middle sensors at ap- Ultrasound sensors

prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
Ultrasound sensors of the
– When a collision is imminent. PDC, for instance in the bump-
ers.
Safety information
Warning
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- Ensure full functionality:
sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk – Do not cover sensors, for instance with
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic stickers, bicycle racks or similar.
conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle sur- – Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
roundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Warning
The system switches on automatically in the
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis- following situations:
tance Control is activated, the warning can
be delayed due to physical circumstances. – If selector lever position R is engaged
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage while drive-ready state is switched on.
to property. Avoid approaching an object The rearview camera also switches on.
too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC – With front PDC: when obstacles are de-
Park Distance Control is not yet active. tected behind or in front of the vehicle
by PDC and the speed is slower than ap-
prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
Overview With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-
stacle detection can be switched off. Via the
With front PDC: button in vehicle Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC Activation": depending
on the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC Activation"
The setting is stored for the driver pro-
file currently used.
Park assistance button
182
Automatic deactivation during 1. "My MINI"

forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded. 3. "Tone"
Switch the system back on, if needed. 4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
With front PDC: switching on/off 6. Set the desired value.
manually
Press the park assistance button. currently used.
– On: the LED lights up. Visual warning

– Off: the LED goes out. The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects
The rearview camera image is displayed if
that are farther away are already displayed
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing
on the Control Display before a signal
the park assistance button.
sounds.
Depending on the equipment version, the
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
system cannot be switched off manually if
Control (PDC) is activated.
the reverse gear is engaged.
The range of the sensors is represented in
Warning colors: red, green and yellow.
When the image of the rearview camera is
Signal tones displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:
An intermittent tone indicates when the ve- "Rear view camera"
hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an
object is detected to the left rear of the ve- System limits
hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker. Safety information
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals. Warning
When the distance to a detected object is The system is designed to operate in cer-
less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin- tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
uous tone is sounded. conditions or other factors, the system
With front PDC: when objects are simulta- may not respond. There may be a risk of
neously located both in front of and behind accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig- tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
nal is sounded. information in this Owner’s Manual re-
Volume tion and limitations.
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to
the entertainment volume can be adjusted.
183
Limits of ultrasonic measurement – On rough road surfaces.

The detection of objects with ultrasonic – On uneven surfaces, such as speed
measurements can run into physical limits, bumps.
for instance under the following conditions: – In large buildings with right angles and
– For small children and animals. smooth walls, for instance in under-
– For persons with certain clothing, for in- ground garages.
stance coats. – In automatic car washes.
– With external interference of the ultra- – Due to heavy exhaust.
sound, for instance from passing vehi- – Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-
cles or loud machines. stance sweeping machines, high pres-
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam- sure steam cleaners or neon lights.
aged or out of position. The malfunction is signaled by a contin-
– If cargo protrudes. uous tone alternating between the front
– Under certain weather conditions such and rear speakers. As soon as the mal-
as high relative humidity, wet condi- function due to other ultrasound sources
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong is no longer present, the system is again
wind. fully functional.
– With tow bars and trailer couplings of With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,
other vehicles. switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-
stacle detection, for instance in car washes;
– With thin or wedge-shaped objects. see Switching on/off.
– With moving objects.
– With elevated, protruding objects such Malfunction
as ledges or cargo. A Check Control message is displayed in the
– With objects with corners and sharp instrument cluster.
edges. Red icon is displayed, and the range
– With objects with a fine surface struc- of the sensors is dimmed on the Con-
ture such as fences. trol Display.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by
– Low objects already displayed, for in- a dealer's service center or another qualified
stance curbs, can move into the blind service center or repair shop.
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
False warnings
Rearview camera
The system may issue a warning under the
following conditions even though there is Concept
no obstacle within the detection range: The rearview camera provides assistance in
– In heavy rain. parking and maneuvering backwards. The
area behind the vehicle is shown on the
– When sensors are very dirty or covered Control Display.
with ice.
– When sensors are covered in snow.
184
Safety information Switching on/off
Warning
Switching on automatically
The system cannot serve as a substitute The system is automatically switched on if
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- selector lever position R is engaged when
sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk the drive-ready state is switched on.
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle sur- Automatic deactivation during
roundings closely and actively intervene forward travel
where appropriate. The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually
button in the vehicle
Press the park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown
on the Control Display.
Switching the view via the Central

Information Display (CID)
Park assistance button If the rearview camera view is not dis-
played, change the view via the Central In-
formation Display (CID):
Camera "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display

– The rearview camera is switched on.
– The tailgate is fully closed.
– Keep the recording range of the camera
open.
The camera lens is located in the handle of
the tailgate. Protruding cargo or carrier systems that
are not connected to a trailer power
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. socket can lead to malfunctions.
If necessary, clean the camera lens.
185
Activating assistance functions Turning radius lines

More than one assistance function can be
active at the same time.
– Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius lines are indi-
cated.
– Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Obstacles are marked, depending on the Turning radius lines can be superimposed
vehicle equipment. on the image of the rearview camera.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
Lanes smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed af-
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-
tain angle.
Obstacle marking
Lanes can be superimposed on the image of

the rearview camera.
Lanes help you to estimate the space re-
quired when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Lanes depend on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-
ing wheel movements.
cle markings can be faded into the image of
the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-
ings match the markings of the PDC Park
Distance Control.
186
Parking using lanes and turning System limits

radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning Detection of objects
radius lines lead to within the limits of Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob-
the parking space. jects such as ledges may not be recognized
by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
assistance functions also consider data from
the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Dis-
play may be closer than they appear. There-
fore, do not estimate the distance from the
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point objects on the display.
where the lane covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Parking assistant
Concept
Display settings
Brightness This system assists the driver in parking
With the rearview camera switched on: parallel to the road.
1. Select the icon.
General information
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller. Parking assistant handling is divided into
three steps:
Contrast – Switching on and activating.
With the rearview camera switched on: – Parking space search.
– Parking.
1. Select the icon.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set- on both sides of the vehicle.
ting is reached and press the Controller.
187
The parking assistant calculates the best Overview

possible parking line and takes control of
steering during the parking operation. Button in the vehicle
System status and instructions on required
actions are displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute Park assistance button
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
limits of the system, it cannot independ- Ultrasound sensors
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle
over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-
age to property, among other potential
The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-
damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
ing spaces are located on the wheel hous-
intervene where appropriate.
ing.
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-
tance Control applies in addition. Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
– Keep the sensors clean and unob-
structed.
For measuring parking spaces

– Maximum speed while driving forward
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
188
– Maximum distance to row of parked ve- Display on the Control Display

hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
System activated/deactivated
Suitable parking space
– Gaps behind an object that has a min. Icon Meaning
length of 5 ft/1.5 m. Gray: the system is not available.
– Gap between two objects with a mini- White: the system is available but
mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. not activated.
– Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx. The system is activated.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Parking space search and system
status
For the parking operation
– Doors and tailgate are closed.
– The parking brake is released.
– When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn sig-
nal must be switched on.
Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button – Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park-
ing assistant is activated and the park-
Press the park assistance button. ing space search is active.
The LED lights up. – Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to
The current status of the parking space
the vehicle symbol. When the parking
search is indicated on the Control Display.
assistant is active, suitable parking
Parking assistant is activated automati- spaces are highlighted.
cally.
– The parking operation is
active. The system takes
Switching on with reverse gear over the steering.
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the Control Display. – Parking space search is always active
To activate: "Parking Assistant" whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is
deactivated. When the system is deacti-
vated, the displays on the Control Dis-
play are shown in gray.
189
Parking using the parking assistant – If the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
Parking – If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display.
1. Press the park assistance button or – If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
shift into reverse gear to switch on the 6 mph/10 km/h.
parking assistant, refer to page 189. Ac-
tivate the parking assistant, if needed. – Possibly on snow-covered or slippery
road surfaces.
Parking assistant is activated.
– If a maximum number of parking at-
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a tempts or the time taken for parking is
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h exceeded.
and at a distance of maximum
5 ft/1.5 m. – If the PDC Park Distance Control dis-
plays clearances that are too small.
The status of the parking space search
and possible parking spaces are dis- – When switching into other functions of
played on the Control Display, refer to the radio.
page 189. A Check Control message is displayed.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control
Display. Resuming
The parking assistant takes control of An interrupted parking operation can be
steering during the parking operation. continued, if needed.
The driver takes over braking and accel- Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
erating. page 189, and follow the instructions on the
The best possible parking position will Control Display.
come after gear change on the station-
ary vehicle - wait for the automatic Switching off
steering wheel move. The system can be switched off as follows:
The end of the parking operation is indi- – Press the park assistance button.
cated on the Control Display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed. System limits
Interrupting manually Safety information
The parking assistant can be interrupted at
any time: Warning
– Press the park assistance button. The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
– "Parking Assistant" conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of
Interrupting automatically accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
The system is interrupted automatically in tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
the following situations: information in this Owner’s Manual re-
190
garding the scope of the system’s opera- – With moving objects.

tion and limitations. – With elevated, protruding objects such
as ledges or cargo.
No parking assistance – With objects with corners and sharp
edges.
The parking assistant does not offer assis-
tance in the following situations: – With objects with a fine surface struc-
ture such as fences.
– In tight curves.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
Functional limitations – Low objects already displayed, for in-
The system may be limited in the following stance curbs, can move into the blind
situations: area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
– On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads. – The parking assistant may identify park-
ing spaces that are not suitable for park-
– On slippery ground. ing.
– With accumulations of leaves/snow in
the parking space. Tire size
– With a mounted emergency wheel. The parking position may vary depending
– With ditches or edges, for instance an on the tire size.
edge of a port.
Malfunction
Limits of ultrasonic measurement A Check Control message is displayed.
The detection of objects with ultrasonic The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-
measurements can run into physical limits, tem checked by a dealer's service center or
for instance under the following conditions: another qualified service center or repair
– For small children and animals. shop.
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats.
– With external interference of the ultra-
sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
– If cargo protrudes.
– Under certain weather conditions such
as high relative humidity, wet condi-
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
wind.
– With tow bars and trailer couplings of
other vehicles.
– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
191
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options – Emission tested passenger compart-
ment.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Microfilter.
specific and optional features offered with – Air conditioning system to control the
the series. It also describes features and temperature, air flow and recirculated-
functions that are not necessarily available air mode.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Depending on the equipment specification:
– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
When using these functions and systems, – Automatic climate control.
the applicable laws and regulations must be – Stationary climate control.
observed.
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by
the following components:
192
Climate control CONTROLS
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left 9 Maximum cooling

2 Display 10 Air conditioning
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 11 Air recirculation mode
4 AUTO program 12 Rear window defroster
5 Air distribution, manual 13 To defrost windows and remove conden-
6 Display sation
7 Temperature, right 14 Seat heating, left 90
8 Seat heating, right 90
Climate control functions in detail Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the
Switching the system on/off left until the control switches
off.
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the
set temperature as quickly as possible, if
193
necessary by using the maximum cooling or Maximum cooling

heating power, and then keeps it constant.
Concept
Adjusting The system is set to the lowest temperature,
Turn the wheel to set the de- maximum air flow and recirculated-air
sired temperature. mode.
The function is available at an outside tem-
Do not rapidly switch between different perature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with
temperature settings. The automatic climate the drive-ready state switched on.
control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature. Switching on/off
Press the button.
Air conditioning The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled Air flows out of the vents to the upper body
and dehumidified and, depending on the region. The vents need to be open for this.
temperature setting, warmed again. The air flow can be adjusted when maxi-
mum cooling is switched on.
The car's interior can be cooled with acti- AUTO program
vated drive-ready or standby state.
Concept
Switching on/off The AUTO program cools, ventilates or
Press the button. heats the car's interior automatically.
The LED is illuminated with air con- For this, the air flow, air distribution and
ditioning switched on. temperature are regulated depending on the
settings and the interior temperature.
Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog up briefly when drive-ready state is Switching on/off
switched on.
Press the button.
Air conditioning is switched on automati-
The LED is illuminated with the
cally with the AUTO program.
AUTO program switched on.
The cooling mode produces condensation,
refer to page 222, that will exit from below Depending on the selected temperature,
the vehicle. AUTO intensity and outside influences, the
air is directed to the windshield, side win-
dows, upper body, and into the floor area.
Point the side vents toward the side win-
dows.
194
The following features are switched on au- With extended air recirculation mode, the
tomatically with the AUTO program: air quality in the interior deteriorates and
– Air conditioning, refer to page 194. window fogging increases.
To switch off the program: press the button If the windows fog over, switch off air recir-
again or manually adjust the air distribu- culation mode and increase the air flow, if
tion. needed.
Controlling the intensity of the air flow Air flow, manual

With the AUTO program switched on, the
Concept
intensity can be adjusted. This changes the
automatic control for the air mass. The air flow for climate control can be ad-
justed manually.
Turn the wheel to set the de-
sired intensity from soft to in- General information
tensive.
To adjust the air flow manually switch off
AUTO program first.
The set intensity is displayed via the posi- Adjusting
tion of the illuminated LED segment.
Turn the ring to set the de-
Air recirculation mode sired air flow.
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tem- The manually adjusted air flow is displayed
porarily suspending the supply of outside via illuminated LED segments.
air. The system then recirculates the air The air flow of the automatic climate con-
flow within the vehicle. trol may be reduced automatically to save
battery power.
Operation
Press the button: Manual air distribution
The LED is illuminated when recir- Concept
culated-air mode is switched on. The supply
of outside air is shut off. The air distribution for climate control can
be adjusted manually.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte- Adjusting
rior.
Press the button repeatedly to se-
To prevent window condensation, recircu- lect a program:
lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
ter a certain amount of time, depending on – Windows, upper body region, and floor
the outside temperature. area.
– Upper body region and floor area.
– Floor area.
195
– Windows and floor area. Ventilation

– Windows.
– Windows and upper body region. Setting
– Upper body region. The air flow directions can be individually
adjusted:
To defrost windows and remove – Direct ventilation:
condensation
The air flow is directly pointed onto the
Concept person. The air flow heats or cools no-
ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-
Ice and condensation are quickly removed perature.
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows. – Indirect ventilation:
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the
Switching on/off air is directly routed into the car's inte-
rior.
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the Front ventilation
system switched on.
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-
gram active.
If there is window condensation, switch on
the climate control function as well.
Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
– Turn knob for continuous opening and
off automatically after a certain period of
closing of the vents.
time.
– Swivel the vents to alter the direction of
When GREEN drive mode is activated, the the vent flow, arrows.
heating output is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
Stationary climate control
In external and recirculated-air mode, the
microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters
dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of Concept
the air. Stationary climate control cools or heats the
Have this filter changed during vehicle car's interior prior to departure to a com-
maintenance, refer to page 260. fortable temperature.
The system automatically cools, vents, or
heats depending on the internal and outside
temperature. Snow and ice may be removed
more easily.
196
General information drive-ready state on and off. The station-

The stationary climate control can be ary climate control is available again.
switched on and off directly or via a preset – The vents of the ventilation are open to
departure time: allow air to flow out.
– Direct operation, refer to page 197.
Switching on/off directly
– Preselected departure times, refer to
page 197.
Concept
The air automatically exits through the
The system can be switched on or off di-
vents to the windshield, the side windows,
rectly.
the upper body region and into the floor
area. The system switches off automatically after
a certain period of time.
The system switches off automatically after
a certain period of time.
Via the Central Information Display
If stationary climate control is used during (CID)
the charging process, less air conditioning
capacity will be required while driving. This The system can be switched on or off via
optimizes the range. the Central Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI"
Functional requirements 2. "Vehicle settings"
– The drive-ready state is deactivated.
3. "Climate functions"
– The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged or the charging cable is con- 4. "Activate comfort climate"
nected. 5. "Activate now"
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis-
charged, it can take some time after con- Climate control for departure time
necting the charging cable, until the sta-
tionary climate control will be Concept
functional. Different departure times can be preset to
– With direct operation or preset depar- ensure a comfortable interior temperature
ture time: depending on inside, outside in the vehicle at the time of departure.
and set desired temperature. The activation time is automatically deter-
Make sure that the vehicle's date and mined based on the temperature.
time are set correctly. The system promptly switches on before the
– To ensure the minimum range of the ve- selected departure time.
hicle, the stationary climate control may The departure time is preselected in two
be automatically switched off, for in- steps:
stance after repeated activation or due
to an insufficient state of charge of the – Set departure times.
high-voltage battery. After the station- – Activate departure times.
ary climate control is switched off due
to an insufficient state of charge, charge Setting the departure time
the high-voltage battery and switch the Via the Central Information Display (CID):
197
1. "My MINI"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. Set the desired departure time, refer to
page 237.
Activating the departure time

If a departure time is to influence the
switching on of the stationary climate con-
trol, the respective departure time must be
activated first.
1. "My MINI"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. "Precondition for departure"
7. Activate the desired departure time.
The icon on the automatic climate con-
trol lights up when the departure time is ac-
tivated.
The icon on the automatic climate con-
trol flashes when the stationary climate
control has been switched on.
198
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

specific and optional features offered with The operation of remote-controlled sys-
the series. It also describes features and tems with the integrated universal remote
functions that are not necessarily available control, such as the garage door, may re-
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
tions or country versions. This also applies coming jammed in a garage door. There is
to safety-related functions and systems. a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
When using these functions and systems, erty. Make sure that the area of movement
the applicable laws and regulations must be of the respective system is clear during
observed. programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held
transmitter.
Integrated Universal Remote
Control
Compatibility
Concept If this symbol is printed on the pack-
aging or in the owner's manual of the
The integrated Universal Remote Control in system to be controlled, the system
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func- is generally compatible with the integrated
tions of remote-controlled systems such as Universal Remote Control.
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-
tems. Additional questions are answered by:
– A dealer's service center or another
General information qualified service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control – www.homelink.com on the Internet.
replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans-
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
tex Corporation.
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular sys-
tem is required in order to program the re-
mote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage
door drive, near metal objects to ensure the
best possible operation.
199
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Overview down the interior mirror button and re-

peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. – The LED lights up green: program-
ming completed.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: programming
is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
1 LED form this procedure three times to
2 Programmable keys complete the programming proce-
dure.
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
If the integrated universal remote
control remains nonoperational, con-
Programming tinue with the special features for
change code wireless systems.
General information – LED does not flash green after
The battery of the hand-held transmitter 60 seconds: programming not com-
must be fully charged at the time of pro- pleted.
gramming to ensure an optimal range of the Repeat steps 3 to 6.
integrated universal remote control.
To program other functions on other but-
1. Switch on the ignition. tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
2. Initial setup:
Special feature of the rolling code
Press and hold the two outer buttons on wireless system
the interior mirror simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the LED If you are unable to operate the system af-
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro- ter repeated programming, please check if
gramming of the buttons on the interior the system to be controlled features a roll-
mirror. ing code radio system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
programmed. The LED on the interior For systems with a rolling code radio sys-
mirror will slowly begin flashing orange. tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the trol and the system also have to be
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 synchronized.
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the Please read the owner's manual to find out
interior mirror. The required distance how to synchronize the system.
depends on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
5. Press and hold the button of the desired second person.
function on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing the universal remote control
Canada: if programming with the hand- with the system:
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
200
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re- Press the button on the interior mir-
mote-controlled system. ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
form this procedure three times to
2. Program the relevant button on the inte- complete the programming proce-
rior mirror as described. dure.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing but- If the integrated universal remote
ton on the system being programmed, control remains nonoperational, con-
e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. tinue with the special features for
30 seconds for the next step. change code wireless systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on – LED does not flash green after
the interior mirror for approximately 60 seconds: programming not com-
3 seconds and then release it. If neces- pleted.
sary, repeat this step up to three times
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
in order to finish synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the pro- If the programming procedure is not com-
grammed function will be carried out. pleted, the previous programming will re-
main unchanged.
Reprogramming individual buttons
Operation
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-
ton to be programmed. Warning
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir- The operation of remote-controlled sys-
ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec- tems with the integrated universal remote
onds, release the button. control, such as the garage door, may re-
sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the coming jammed in a garage door. There is
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the erty. Make sure that the area of movement
interior mirror. The required distance of the respective system is clear during
depends on the hand-held transmitter. programming and operation. Also follow
5. Press and hold the button of the desired the safety information of the hand-held
function on the hand-held transmitter. transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold The system, such as the garage door, can be
down the interior mirror button and re- operated using the button on the interior
peatedly press and release the hand-held mirror while the engine is running or when
transmitter button for 2 seconds. the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
system until the function is activated. The
– The LED lights up green: the pro- interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-
gramming procedure is completed. less signal is being transmitted.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: the hand-held Deleting stored functions
transmitter was detected but pro- All stored functions will be deleted. The
gramming is not complete. functions cannot be deleted individually.
201
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the Operating concept
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
Various functions can be called up by press-
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in-
ing the control button with a pointed object,
terior mirror flashes green rapidly.
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The following setting options are
displayed in succession, depending on how
Digital compass long the control button is pressed:
– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
Overview – 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the ve-
hicle so that the compass operates correctly;
1 Control button refer to World map with compass zones.
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The compass shows the current driving di-
rection.
202
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap- 1. Make sure that there are no large metal-
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the lic objects or overhead power lines near
set compass zone appears in the mirror. the vehicle and that there is sufficient
2. To change the zone setting, press the room to drive around in a circle.
control button quickly and repeatedly 2. Set the currently applicable compass
until the number of the compass zone zone.
that corresponds with your location ap- 3. Press and hold the control button for ap-
pears in the mirror. prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
The set zone is stored automatically. The on the display. Next, drive in a complete
compass is ready for use again after approx- circle at least once at a speed of no more
imately 10 seconds. than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points
Calibrating the digital compass of the compass.
The digital compass must be calibrated in
the event of the following: Left/right-hand steering
– The wrong compass point is displayed. The digital compass is already set for right
or left-hand steering at the factory.
– The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direc-
tion of travel. Setting the language
– Not all points of the compass are dis- Press and hold the control button for ap-
played. prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the
203
control button again to switch between Ashtray/cigarette lighter

English "E" and German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
Overview
Sun visor
Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the
sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror The ashtray is located in one of the frontal

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in
behind a cover. the center console.
When the cover is opened, the mirror light-
ing switches on. Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the
ashtray from the cup holder.
Dashboard
Cigarette lighter
Decorative trim
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can
cause burns. Flammable materials can ig-
nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is
held against the objects. There is a risk of
fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage
Customizable decorative trim is available to property, among other potential dam-
for the dashboard on the driver’s side and age. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by
on the passenger's side. its handle. Make sure that children do not
Follow the assembly instructions. use the cigarette lighter.
204
NOTICE NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of can work with high voltages and currents,
damage to property, among other potential which means that the 12 volt electrical
damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or system can be overloaded or damaged.
socket cover again after using the socket. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Only con-
nect battery chargers for the vehicle bat-
Operation tery to the starting aid terminals in the en-
Push in the cigarette lighter. gine compartment.
The cigarette lighter can be
removed as soon as it pops
back out. NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential
Sockets damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket In the center console
for electrical equipment when standby and
drive-ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-
compatible connectors.
Safety information Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's in-
terior during unfolding. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that devices and cables
are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.
205
In the cargo area Properties of lower USB port:

– USB port Type C.
– For charging mobile devices and for
data transfer.
– Charge current: max. 3 A.
Wireless charging tray

Concept
The socket is located on the right side in
the cargo area. The wireless charging tray enables the fol-
lowing functions to be performed without
cables:
– Charging the rechargeable battery of a
USB port mobile phone with Qi capability and of
other mobile devices, which support the
General information Qi standard.
Follow the information regarding the con- – Connect the mobile phone to the exter-
nection of mobile devices to the USB port in nal antenna.
the section on USB connections, refer to Depending on the country, this provides
page 55. for better network reception and a con-
sistent reproduction quality.
In the center console
General information
When inserting the mobile phone, make
sure there are no objects between it and the
wireless charging tray.
During charging, the surface of the tray and
the mobile phone may become warm.
Higher temperatures may lead to a reduc-
tion in the charge current through the mo-
bile phone, and in isolated cases the charg-
Depending on the equipment version, a USB ing process is paused temporarily. Follow
port Type A or a USB port Type A and a USB the relevant instructions in the mobile
port Type C are located in the front of the phone owner's manual.
center console.
NOTE
Properties of upper USB port: This device has been tested for human ex-
– USB port Type A. posure limits and found compliant at a mini-
– For charging mobile devices and for mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during opera-
data transfer. tion.
– Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
206
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be Functional requirements

maintained in every direction when operat-
– Ignition or standby state is switched on.
ing the device.
– The mobile phone must compatibly sup-
port the required Qi standard. Compati-
ble mobile phones, refer to page 53.
If the mobile phone does not support the
Qi standard, the mobile phone can be
charged using a special Qi-compatible
charging case.
– Use only protective jackets and covers
up to a maximum thickness of
0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging
Mounting position of the product. function may be impaired.
– The mobile phone must not exceed the
Safety information maximum size of approximately 5.9 x
3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.
Warning
Overview
When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any The wireless charging tray is located in the
metal objects located between the device center armrest.
and the tray can become very hot. Placing
storage devices or electronic cards, such
as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips
or cards for signal transmission, between
the device and the tray may impair the
card function. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. When charg-
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
objects between the device and the tray.
1 Front holder with LED
2 Storage area
NOTICE
3 Movable clamp
The tray is intended for mobile phones up
to a particular size. Forceful inserting of
the mobile phone into the tray can damage Inserting the mobile phone
the tray or the mobile phone. There is a
1. Open the center armrest.
risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Observe the maximum 2. Push back the clamp.
dimensions for mobile phones. Do not
force the mobile phone into the tray.
207
3. Insert the mobile phone with the display LED displays

facing upward in the direction of the
front holder, arrow 1. Color Meaning
Blue The mobile phone is charging.
Depending on the model, the
blue LED is no longer illuminated
once the inserted mobile phone
with Qi capability is fully
charged.
Or- The mobile phone is not charg-
ange ing.
4. Place the mobile phone in the storage Temperature on the mobile
area, arrow 2. phone possibly too high or for-
eign object in the charging tray.
5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the
mobile phone in the tray. Red The mobile phone is not charg-
6. Close the center armrest. ing.
Contact a dealer’s service center
Removing the mobile phone or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
1. Open the center armrest.
2. Push the clamp back and remove the System limits
mobile phone.
At high temperatures on the mobile phone
or in the vehicle, the charging functions of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer work.
LTE-Compensator - Information
and User Manual
Your car is equipped with a wireless charg-
ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone
and connect it to the mobile network. To en-
sure the best possible connection a signal
booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in con-
junction with the WCA. The following para-
graphs refer to this booster:
This is a CONSUMER device.
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS
DEVICE with your wireless provider and
have your provider's consent. Most wireless
providers consent to the use of Compensa-
tors. Some providers may not consent to the
use of this device on their network. If you
208
are unsure, contact your provider. You tennas or coupling devices will cause the
MUST operate this device with approved an- cease of the booster´s operating license.
tennas and cables as specified by the manu- The booster device fulfills the network pro-
facturer. Antennas MUST be installed at tection standards as required by the FCC,
least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You such as intermodulation limits, oscillation
MUST cease operating this device immedi- detection and gain limits.
ately if requested by the FCC or a licensed
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
wireless service provider. Warning E911 lo-
cation information may not be provided or Model Number: LTECOMPB0
may be inaccurate for calls served by using Part Number: 6803145-01
this device. FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
Please observe additionally the following in-
formation
– Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to
register their signal boosters by calling
their toll-free number.
– T-Mobile online registration link:
(www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra-
tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/
SignalBooster#).
– Verizon’s online registration link:
(http://www.verizonwireless.com/
wcms/consumer/register-signal-boos-
ter.html).
– AT&T online registration link (https://
securec45.securewebsession.com/
attsignalbooster.com/).
– U.S.Cellular online registration link
(http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/
support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).
Before use you must register your booster
device with your wireless provider.
If you should be requested by the FCC to
cease operating your booster, you are not
allowed to insert your mobile phone in the
charging tray anymore unless the booster is
permanently deactivated by your local MINI
dealer.
You must not remove the booster from the
car nor use it with any other than the prein-
stalled coupling device or antenna. Any
modification of the existing antenna or cou-
pling device as well as the use of other an-
209
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options – Glove compartment on the front passen-
ger side.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Compartments in the doors.
specific and optional features offered with – Storage compartment in the center arm-
the series. It also describes features and rest.
functions that are not necessarily available – Storage compartment in front of the cup
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- holders.
– Clothes hooks
When using these functions and systems, – Storage tray in the center console.
the applicable laws and regulations must be – Pockets on the backrests of the front
observed. seats.
Safety information Glove compartment

Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con- Warning
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown about the car's in- Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
terior while driving, for instance in the trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive glove compartment can be thrown into the
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure car's interior while driving, for instance in
loose objects or devices with a cable con- the event of an accident, braking or eva-
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior. sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury.
Always close the glove compartment im-
mediately after using it.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential
damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Overview
The following storage compartments are
available in the car's interior:
210
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening Center armrest

General information
The center armrest contains a storage com-
partment.
Opening
Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment
switches on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-
rest upward, arrow 2.
Compartments in the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the
doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an acci-
Press button, arrow 1, and swing center
dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.
armrest upward or downward into the de-
Broken glass can be scattered in the car's
sired height, arrow 2.
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not use any break-
able objects while driving. Only stow
breakable objects in closed storage com-
partments.
211
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Cup holders Rear
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders
may damage the cup holders or be thrown
about the car’s interior in the event of an
accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful
braking. Spilled liquids can distract from
the traffic conditions and lead to an acci- In front of the back seats and in the side
dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup armrests.
holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use Clothes hooks
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable
containers. Do not transport hot bever-
ages. General information
The clothes hooks are located above the
side windows in the rear.
Front
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of accident. When suspending cloth-
ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure
that they will not obstruct the driver's
view.
In the center console.
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead
to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-
stance clothing articles, from the clothes
hooks.
212
Cargo area CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
the series. It also describes features and Warning
functions that are not necessarily available Improperly stowed objects can shift and
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- be thrown into the car's interior, for in-
tions or country versions. This also applies stance in the event of an accident or dur-
to safety-related functions and systems. ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi-
When using these functions and systems, cle occupants can be hit and injured. There
the applicable laws and regulations must be is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects
observed. and cargo properly.
Loading NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
Safety information There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure
that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Warning
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sud- Steps for Determining Correct Load
den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving Limit
characteristics may be negatively im-
1. Locate the statement “The combined
pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-
weight of occupants and cargo should
ing the braking distances and changing
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
the steering response. There is a risk of
your vehicle’s placard.
accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed 2. Determine the combined weight of the
the permitted gross weight. driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
Warning driver and passengers from XXX kg or
Loose objects or devices with a cable con- XXX lbs
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile 4. The resulting figure equals the available
phones, can be thrown about the car's in- amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
terior while driving, for instance in the pacity. For example, if the “XXX”
event of an accident, braking or evasive amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo and
213
CONTROLS Cargo area
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - – Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) the backrests.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug- – Small and light cargo: secure with
gage and cargo being loaded on the ve- ratchet straps or draw straps.
hicle. That weight may not safely exceed – Larger and heavy cargo: secure with
the available cargo and luggage load ca- cargo straps.
pacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred Lashing eyes in the cargo area
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the availa-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Load
Without storage compartment package: to

secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes,
arrows 1, in the cargo area.
With storage compartment package: to se-
cure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, ar-
rows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.
The maximum load is the sum of the weight
of the occupants and the cargo. Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or
The greater the weight of the occupants, cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo
the less cargo that can be transported. area.
Stowing and securing cargo
– Cover sharp edges and corners on the Cargo cover
cargo.
– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos- General information
sible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear passenger seat backrests. When the tailgate is opened, the cargo
cover is raised.
– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
– If necessary, fold down the rear back-
rests to stow large cargo.
214
Cargo area CONTROLS
Safety information Storage space under cargo

floor panel
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown about the car's in-
terior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure
loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
Located under the cargo floor panel on the

Removing right side is a trough for the onboard vehi-
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover cle tool kit.
can be removed.
Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel
1. Detach the left and right retaining upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool
straps at the tailgate. kit.
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets
on the left and right.
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
– The rear seat backrests can be folded
down.
– The rear seat backrests can be moved
into an upright loading position using
the cargo setting.
Installing
General information
1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-
tally into the two side brackets until it The rear seat backrest is divided into two
audibly engages. parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat
backrest is connected to the center section.
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps
at the tailgate. The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the rear.
215
CONTROLS Cargo area
Safety information Folding down the rear seat

backrest from the rear
Warning 1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded
Danger of jamming with folding down the down, hook the corresponding safety
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk belt into the belt buckle on the side.
of damage to property. Make sure that the 2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the
area of movement of the rear backrest and rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.
the of the head restraint is clear prior to
folding down.
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an ac-
cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the rear seat backrest is locked after fold- Cargo position
ing it back.
Concept
The rear seat backrests can be moved into
Warning an upright loading position.
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect Adjusting
seat setting or improper installation of the
1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re- 2. Fold the frame up until it engages.
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
Warning
3. Fold back and engage the rear seat
Body parts can be jammed when moving backrest.
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is Folding back the backrest
Fold up the backrest and press it into the
latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not
216
Cargo area CONTROLS
caught behind the backrest or in between Lower position

the backrest and the rear seats.
The red marking on the lever disappears
completely.
Variable cargo area floor

Concept
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo
area can be configured corresponding to – Larger objects can be transported.
transport requirements. – Space for smaller objects remains be-
tween the fixed and variable cargo area
General information floor.
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer
to page 213. Folded up position
Removing the cargo floor panel Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the variable cargo floor
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying
about during braking and evasive maneu-
vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property.
– Do not use the variable cargo floor
panel to separate the cargo area and
Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and vehicle interior in the sense of a par-
fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward tition net.
from the supports.
– Only use the variable cargo floor
The cargo floor panel can be removed from panel in the folded-up position when
the cargo area above the tail lights. the backrests are folded up and
locked.
– Fold down the variable cargo floor
panel before driving off.
– Always secure cargo against shifting,
using straps, belts and lashing eyes,
for instance.
217
CONTROLS Cargo area
Fold up the cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower

position and push it behind the locks, arrow.
You've reached the maximum cargo height.
Upper position
– With the backrests folded down, a long,

flat loading surface is produced.
– Maximum load in this position:
330 lbs/150 kg.
– Space for objects remains between the
fixed and variable cargo area floor.
218
Cargo area CONTROLS
219
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options new; they achieve their full traction poten-
tial after a break-in time.
This chapter describes all standard, country- Drive conservatively for the first
specific and optional features offered with 200 miles/300 km.
functions that are not necessarily available Brake system
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Brake discs and brake pads only reach their
tions or country versions. This also applies full effectiveness after ap-
to safety-related functions and systems. prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately
When using these functions and systems, during this break-in period.
observed. Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob-
served if any of the components mentioned
Breaking-in period above have to be renewed in the course of
the vehicle's operating life.
General information
Moving parts need to begin working to-
gether smoothly. General driving notes
The following instructions will help you to
achieve a long vehicle life and good effi- Closing the tailgate
ciency.
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
Warning An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-
Due to new parts and components, safety cle and can endanger occupants and other
and driver assistance systems can react traffic participants or damage the vehicle
with a delay. There is a risk of accident. in the event of an accident, braking or eva-
After installing new parts or with a new sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or
vehicle, drive conservatively and inter- risk of damage to property. Do not drive
vene early if necessary. Observe the break- with the tailgate open.
in procedures of the respective parts and
components.
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
Tires avoided:
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- – Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
220
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
– Greatly increase the air flow from the ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-
vents. cle.
– Drive moderately.
Driving through water
Ice on window glass
General information
NOTICE When driving through water, follow the fol-
lowing:
The window will be lowered slightly when
pulling on the door handle. In the event of – Drive through calm water only.
frost, the window may freeze up and not – Drive through water only if it is not
be lowered. There is a risk of damage to deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
property, among other potential damage. – Drive through water no faster than
When pulling on the door handle, make walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
sure that the window is lowered. If neces-
sary, remove snow and ice from the win- Safety information
dow. Do not open the door with force.
NOTICE
Mobile communication devices in When driving too quickly through too
the vehicle deep water, water can enter into the en-
gine compartment, the electrical system or
the transmission. There is a risk of damage
Warning to property, among other potential dam-
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can age. When driving through water, do not
influence one another. There is radiation exceed the maximum indicated water level
due to the transmission operations of mo- and the maximum speed for driving
bile phones. There is a risk of injury or through water.
risk of damage to property. If possible, in
the car's interior use only mobile phones
with direct connections to an exterior an- Braking safely
tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-
ence and deflect the radiation from the General information
car's interior. The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock
Braking System ABS as a standard feature.
Hydroplaning Perform an emergency stop in situations
that require such.
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water
can form between the tires and road sur- Steering is still responsive. You can still
face. avoid any obstacles with a minimum of
steering effort.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing. It is characterized by a partial or Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds
complete loss of contact between the tires from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the
and the road surface, ultimately undermin- Antilock Braking System ABS is in its active
mode.
221
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Objects in the area around the pedals Safety information
Warning Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit Light but consistent brake pressure can
the pedal distance or block a depressed lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing
pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- out and possibly even brake failure. There
jects in the vehicle such that they are se- is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces-
cured and cannot enter into the driver's sive stress on the brake system.
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats Warning
and do not layer several floor mats. Make
In idle state or with drive-ready state
sure that there is sufficient clearance for
switched off, safety-relevant functions, for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
instance drive system braking effect, brak-
securely fastened again after they were re-
ing force boost and steering assistance,
moved, for instance for cleaning.
are restricted or not available at all. There
is a risk of accident. Do not drive in idle
Driving in wet conditions state or with drive-ready state switched
off.
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy
rain, gently press the brake pedal every few
miles. Brake disc corrosion
Ensure that this action does not endanger Corrosion on the brake discs and contami-
other traffic. nation on the brake pads are increased by
The heat generated during braking dries the following circumstances:
brake discs and brake pads and protects – Low mileage.
them against corrosion.
– Extended periods when the vehicle is
In this way braking efficiency will be avail- not used at all.
able when you need it.
– Infrequent use of the brakes.
Hills – Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
General information Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will
The braking effect of the drive system can cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in
be influenced through the energy recovery. their response - generally this cannot be
corrected.
Condensation water under the

parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects
underneath the vehicle.
222
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Ground clearance – Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom.
NOTICE – Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-
stance using ratchet straps.
If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,
curbs or underground garage entrances, – Do not let objects project into the open-
contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, ing path of the tailgate.
and the underbody may occur. There is a – Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-
risk of damage to property, among other celeration and braking maneuvers. Take
potential damage. Ensure that there is suf- corners gently.
ficient ground clearance available.
Driving on racetracks
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Warning
General information The vehicle is not designed for use in M
Installation only possible with roof rack. Sport or motor sport type competition.
Roof racks are available as special accesso- There is a risk of accident. Do not use the
ries. vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type
competitions.
Mounting
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
Follow the installation instructions of the racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
roof rack. Use of the vehicle in M sport or motor sport
type competition is an improper use of the
Loading vehicle and may affect your warranty cover-
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise age. See “New Vehicle Limited Warranty”
the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, for more details.
they have a major effect on vehicle handling
and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
– Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
– Distribute the roof load uniformly.
– The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
223
DRIVING TIPS Increasing range
Increasing range
Vehicle features and options Attached parts on the vehicle impair the
aerodynamics and increase the energy con-
sumption.
functions that are not necessarily available Close the windows and glass
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sunroof
to safety-related functions and systems. Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
When using these functions and systems, open results in increased air resistance and
the applicable laws and regulations must be thereby reduces the range.
observed.
Tires
General information
General information
The vehicle contains comprehensive tech-
nologies for reducing energy consumption Tires can affect energy consumption in vari-
and for maximizing the range. ous ways, for instance energy consumption
can be influenced by tire size.
The range depends on a number of different
factors, refer to page 128.
Check the tire inflation pressure
The implementation of certain measures,
driving style and regular maintenance can
regularly
increasing the range and thereby also re- Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla-
duce the environmental impact. tion pressure at least twice a month and be-
fore starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling
Remove unnecessary cargo resistance and thus raises energy consump-
tion and tire wear.
Additional weight reduces the range.
Stationary climate control
Remove attached parts follow-
Run advance climate control, refer to
ing use page 196, in the vehicle during charging be-
fore driving off.
Remove roof-mounted which are no longer
Heating and cooling operations are very en-
required following use.
ergy intensive and substantially reduce the
electric range.
224
Increasing range DRIVING TIPS
Look well ahead when driving Have maintenance carried out

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces Have the vehicle maintained regularly to
energy consumption. achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak- ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-
ing. nance work be performed by a MINI service
center.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the
vehicle driving ahead of you. Also note the MINI maintenance systems,
refer to page 260.
Longer braking procedures result in more
efficient charging of the high-voltage bat-
tery via energy recovery from braking.
Using eDRIVE efficiently
Use accelerator pedal for de- Concept

celeration and coasting eDRIVE operates automatically. Proactive
driving utilizes energy consumption and en-
ergy recovery optimally. Energy recovery is
When approaching a red light, use accelera-
used to charge the high-voltage battery. En-
tor pedal for decelerating.
ergy recovery is important for the supply of
For going downhill use coasting function; electrical components and thus a prerequi-
for this purpose, press accelerator pedal just site for a long range. Energy consumption
enough that the vehicle rolls. and recovery depend very much, among
other things, on your driving style.
Switch off any functions that Optimizing driving style

are not currently needed
Performance display
Functions such as seat heating and the rear Your driving style can be optimized using
window defroster require a lot of energy the performance display.
and reduce the range, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
The GREEN and GREEN+ drive modes sup-
port the energy-conserving use of comfort
features. They automatically perform a par-
tial or complete deactivation of these func-
tions.
The energy recovery occurs during coasting
and braking and is displayed in the perform-
ance display by the accelerator pedal indica-
tor.
225
The accelerator pedal indicator is within the Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for lon-
CHARGE range. ger than four weeks with a charge state
Efficient energy recovery: below approx. 80 %.
– The accelerator pedal moves in the yel-
low range of the CHARGE display, ar-
row 1. GREEN Mode
– The energy consumption while driving
can be optimized by efficient accelera-
tion. Concept
Set high energy recovery, refer to page 108, GREEN Mode supports a driving style that
to recover as much energy as possible. saves on consumption. For this purpose, the
engine control and comfort features, for in-
Efficient acceleration: stance the climate control output, are ad-
– The accelerator pedal moves in the yel- justed.
low range of the ePOWER display, ar- In addition, context-sensitive instructions
row 2. are displayed to assist with an efficient
– Use deceleration by coasting as often as driving style.
possible for energy recovery.
General information
Discharge of the high-voltage The system includes the following MINI-
battery MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis-
plays:
General information – GREEN Limit, refer to page 227
Longer idle periods, refer to page 277, can – GREEN climate control, refer to
reduce the charge state of the high-voltage page 227.
battery. – GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 227.
Safety information – MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to
page 228.
NOTICE
The high-voltage battery can be damaged Activating GREEN Mode
if left uncharged or with low charge for ex- Press the MINI Driving Modes
tended periods. There is a risk of damage switch downward until
to property, among other potential dam- GREEN is displayed in the in-
age. Before storing the vehicle for an ex- strument cluster.
tended period, ensure that the high-volt-
age battery is fully charged. During the
idle period, connect the vehicle to a charg-
ing station at a compatible charging loca-
Configuring GREEN
tion. If necessary, the high-voltage battery
will be charged automatically. Make sure Via MINI Driving Modes switch
that charging is carried out. Regularly 1. Activating GREEN Mode.
check the charge state. 2. "Configure GREEN"
226
3. Select the desired setting. GREEN potential savings

Shows potential savings with the current
Via the Central Information Display settings in percentages.
(CID)
1. "My MINI" Display in the instrument cluster
GREEN tip, driving instruction
4. Select the desired setting. General information
The GREEN tip indicates that your driving
Activating/deactivating the functions style can be modified to be more efficient,
The following functions can be activated/ for example by backing off the accelerator.
deactivated:
– "GREEN speed warning" Activating/deactivating the display
– "GREEN climate control" Activate information relating to the driving
style and GREEN tips in the instrument
– "Coasting" cluster using the Central Information Dis-
Settings are stored for the driver profile play (CID):
currently used.
1. "My MINI"
GREEN Limit 2. "System settings"
– "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit 3. "Displays"
is activated. 4. "Instrument panel"
A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of
5. "GREEN info"
the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
– "Tip at:" GREEN tip, symbols
Set the desired speed for the GREEN An additional icon and text instructions are
Limit. displayed.
When GREEN+ is activated, the GREEN
Limit is set to 55 mph/90 km/h. Icon Measure
For an efficient driving style, look
GREEN climate control well ahead when driving, acceler-
Climate control is set to be efficient. ate conservatively, and delay ac-
celerating.
By making a slight change to the set tem-
perature and adjusting the rate of heating Reduce speed to the selected
or cooling of the car's interior consumption GREEN speed.
can be economized.
The power output to the seat heater and ex-
terior mirror is reduced.
227
Indications on the Control Display Display on the Control Display

The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer
Displaying MINIMALISM information consists of a fish in a water glass and a
The current efficiency of the functions in value table.
GREEN drive mode can be displayed on the The fish and the movements of the water in
Control Display. the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the
Via the Central Information Display (CID): driving style.
Depending on the equipment, the fish is
1. "My MINI"
shown with efficient and inefficient driving
2. "Technology in action" style or only with inefficient driving style.
3. "MINIMALISM" The more efficient the driving style, the less
Information is shown on the following func- the water sloshes around in the bowl and
tions: the better is the fish's mood. If the driving
style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the
– Auto Start/Stop function. fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number
– Energy recovery. of stars is displayed.
The table of values contains stars and evalu-
MINIMALISM analyzer ates the driving style in different catego-
ries. The more efficient the driving style,
Concept the more stars are displayed in the table.
In this situation, the function helps develop To assist with an efficient driving style,
an especially efficient driving style and to GREEN tips are displayed while driving.
save energy. Tips for an energy-saving driving style, In-
For this purpose, the driving style is ana- creasing the range, refer to page 224.
lyzed. The assessment is done in various
categories and is displayed on the Control
Display.
This display will help you adjust your driv-
ing style and save some energy.
This function is available in GREEN drive
mode.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
228
229
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

Vehicle features and options – AC charging station.
– DC charging station.
This chapter describes all standard, country- For optimal use of the energy from the
specific and optional features offered with power mains, charging at a charging sta-
the series. It also describes features and tion, for instance MINI Wallbox, is recom-
functions that are not necessarily available mended.
tions or country versions. This also applies Charge current
When using these functions and systems, General information
The charge current strength is indicated in
observed.
amperes.
The vehicle cannot automatically detect the
Concept maximum permissible charge current
strength of the power grid during charging
via a household socket.
The vehicle can be charged using various
charging cables at charging stations or Charging on a household socket
household sockets. Control and monitoring
of the charging process are handled com- Prior to the first charging at your own
pletely automatically. The charge current household socket, as well as when charging
strength can be set via the Central Informa- at external electrical power sockets, the al-
tion Display (CID). lowed charge current strength must be de-
termined, for instance by a qualified electri-
cian.
General information The charge current strength for charging at
a household socket, refer to page 236, can
be adjusted in the vehicle in three levels.
High-voltage battery At delivery, the charge current for charging
The high-voltage battery is used as an en- at a household socket is set to the lowest
ergy accumulator. The high-voltage battery level.
can be charged utilizing energy recovery Depending on the country-specific version,
during the trip or via the power grid. one of several ampere ratings is printed on
In order to operate the high-voltage battery the Mode 2 charging cable. This ampere rat-
optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and ing is the limit which must be adhered to
fully using a compatible charger. for the vehicle if the charge current is set to
When charging via the power grid, you can the highest level. Depending on the charg-
chose between the following variants: ing cable, the charge current strength may
– Household socket. vary when lower levels are set.
230
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
Overview
Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting

"Max." "Reduced" "Low"
6A 6A 6A 6A
8A 8A 6A 6A
10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6A
12 A 12 A 9A 6A
15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A
Depending on the charge current setting, – Household socket and connected cir-
the charging duration changes. cuits.
Safety information Warning

Damaged or worn charging devices, for in-
stance worn contacts, can heat up. There
Warning is a risk of fire. Only use charging devices
that are in good condition.
Improper working with electrical current
can lead to an electric shock due to high
voltages or high currents. There is a risk
of fire or danger to life. Observe the gen- Warning
eral safety regulations when working with Contact with live components can lead to
electrical current. an electric shock. High voltage is present
at the charging connection. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
Warning The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
A faulty and incorrectly designed charging mends that work on the charging connec-
device at the charging location can cause tion, for instance cleaning, be performed
damage to the vehicle and overload the by a dealer’s service center or another
power mains at the charging location. qualified service center or repair shop.
There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that, prior to your first use of a Charging cable
charging location, you have the compati-
bility of the following components con-
firmed: General information
– Charging cable. Use a Mode 2 charging cable, Mode 3 charg-
– Charging station. ing cable, or the permanently installed cable
of a charging station to charge the vehicle.
231
Different charging cables can be required When a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the
depending on the country. efficiency values may differ from those
stated on the energy label.
Safety information The Mode 2 charging cable is also referred
to as standard charging cable.
Warning
Mode 3 charging cable
Non-compatible charging cables or unsuit-
able charging stations can heat up and Depending on the country version, the vehi-
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a cle is supplied with a Mode 3 charging ca-
risk of fire. Use charging cables or charg- ble.
ing stations for charging that are suitable The Mode 3 charging cable makes it possi-
for the respective vehicle type. ble to quickly recharge at sockets of desig-
A dealer's service center will be glad to nated AC charging stations using a special
provide information about suitable charg- connector. Charging is performed with al-
ing cables. ternating current at designated AC charging
stations. The charging process can be com-
pleted faster than at household sockets.
Warning A charge current strength of up to maxi-
mum 16 A is possible.
Improper use of the charging cable can
prevent charging and lead to damage, for The charging cable may be permanently in-
instance cable fire. There is a risk of fire. stalled at the charging station.
Use the charging cable only for charging The Mode 3 charging cable is also referred
the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca- to as AC quick charging cable.
bles or adapters.
DC charging cable
The DC charging cable that is permanently
Warning installed at the charging station makes is
Damaged charging cables can heat up or possible to charge at DC charging stations.
lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of Charging is performed with direct current
fire or a risk of injury. Use undamaged at designated DC charging stations. At the
charging cables only. higher dimensioned power connection of a
DC charging station, the charging time is
normally substantially shorter compared to
Mode 2 charging cable a household socket or AC charging station.
Depending on the country version, the vehi- During charging at a DC charging station,
cle is supplied with a Mode 2 charging ca- an indication in the instrument cluster, re-
ble. fer to page 237, is displayed.
Mode 2 charging cables can be used to The vehicle must be charged with a 30 m
charge the vehicle from grounded house- DC charging cable exclusively.
hold sockets. Charging at household socket The DC charging cable is also referred to as
connections is performed with alternating Mode 4 charging cable.
current.
232
Storage 1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.

For the delivery, the charging cable is The charging socket flap opens.
stowed in the luggage compartment, for in-
stance under the cargo floor panel or in a
bag.
Stow charging cable after use in the same
place again.
If required, store the charging cable with
the installed connector cover to prevent
moisture in the charging cable plug.
Connecting 2. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.
Charging socket flap
3. Remove the cover of the charging cable

connector, if needed.
The charging socket flap is located on the
4. Connect the Mode 2 charging cable to
right side of the vehicle.
the household socket or the Mode 3
Always keep charging socket clean and un- charging cable to the port at the AC
obstructed. charging station as needed.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when 5. Insert the appropriate charging cable
the charging socket is not used. connector, and push it in until it en-
gages.
Connecting the charging cable When charging at a charging station, follow
To connect, engage selector lever posi- the instructions at the charging station.
tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-
lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if Removing
needed. AC charging: when the charging process is
active and the vehicle is locked, the charg-
ing cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle be-
fore removing the cable.
Direct current charging: during the charg-
ing process, the charging cable is locked.
When the charging process is completed,
233
the charging cable is automatically un- Unlocking the charging cable

locked.
If necessary, clean the area between the Concept
charging socket flap and charging socket, In the following situations, the Mode 2
for instance from snow, before removing it. charging cable or Mode 3 charging cable
1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key can be unlocked and removed electronically:
if it is locked. – When the vehicle is locked.
Charging cable is unlocked. – When a charging station is defective.
2. Press the release button on the handle,
arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at Unlocking
the gripping areas. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Charging process is interrupted. 1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Settings charging current"
4. "Unlock charging cable"
Charging process
General information
3. Remove the charging cable from the At high temperatures, the high-voltage bat-
charging socket, arrow 2. tery is initially cooled. There may be a delay
4. Put the charging socket lid back on. before charging starts. If the high-voltage
5. Press on the charging socket flap until it battery is discharged, cooling of the high-
engages. voltage battery may not be possible. The
charging process cannot be started.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable con-
nector, if needed. If the Mode 2 charging cable is exposed to
high temperatures and direct sunlight, this
7. Disconnect the Mode 2 charging cable may interrupt the charging process. Charg-
from the household socket or the Mode ing will resume automatically.
3 charging cable from the port at the AC
charging station as needed. The charging process may take longer under
extremely low or high temperatures.
8. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the perma- Safety information
nently installed charging cable in the
place provided for it.
Warning
Improper use of the power mains connec-
tion can lead to damage, for instance cable
fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Use the charging ca-
234
ble only for charging the vehicle, and do 5. Open the charging socket flap.
not extend it using cables or adapters. 6. Connect the charging cable to the vehi-
cle, refer to page 233.
7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Warning
If the charge current strength is adjusted Charging status display
incorrectly, the power mains of the house-
hold socket can be overloaded and over- Indicator light at the charging socket
heat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the
charge current strength to the power
mains prior to charging on household
sockets. With unknown power networks,
set on the lowest level.
Warning
An incorrectly connected charging cable
can lead to damage, for instance cable fire.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage An indicator light is located on the charging
to property. Make sure that the charging socket.
cable connector is completely inserted in
the charging socket. Charging status
Light Charging status

NOTICE
White Charging cable can be con-
Any weight on the opened charging port nected or removed.
cover may damage it. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential Flashes or- Charging process is being
damage. Do not put weight onto the charg- ange prepared.
ing port cover, for instance by setting Yellow Charging process paused.
down the charging cable.
Flashes yel- Charging process is active.
low
Starting the charging process Flashes red Fault in the charging proc-
1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the rapidly ess.
parking brake, if needed.
Green Charging process is com-
2. For planning the charging process, refer pleted.
to page 236.
3. Switch off drive-ready state. When the vehicle is locked, the indicator
4. Connect the Mode 2 charging cable to light goes out after some time.
the household socket or the Mode 3 When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellow
charging cable to the port at the AC indicator light flashes continuously. The
235
other indicator lights go out after some – "Charge for departure time": if a de-
time. parture time is set, a time window
Press the button on the vehicle key to for charging with a favorable elec-
check the charging state. The charging sta- tricity rate can be set.
tus is indicated on the indicator light. In
some cases the vehicle is locked. Setting the time window for favorable-
Additional messages about the charging sta- rate
tus, for instance the probable end of charg- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
ing or the planned departure time, can be
1. "My MINI"
shown in the instrument cluster or on the
Control Display. 2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set low cost time slot"
Planning the charging process 4. Set rate begin.
General information 5. Set rate end.
The charging process can be adapted to The vehicle can also start the charging proc-
constraints, for instance the cost of electric- ess before the selected time window begins
ity. The vehicle controls the charging proc- or end it after the selected time window fin-
ess in such a way that the charging process ishes. The starting point of the charging
is completed if possible at the departure process is adjusted so the vehicle can be as
time. A departure time must be set for this fully charged as possible and, if applicable,
purpose, refer to page 237. its climate adjusted by the departure time.
The following settings are available:
Set the charge current for charging
– Immediate charging. via a Mode 2 charging cable
– Set time window for favorable charging. Depending on the electrical mains, the vehi-
– Set the charge current for charging via a cle must be charged with a different charge
Mode 2 charging cable. current strength, refer to page 230.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes Via the Central Information Display (CID):
can be made via the Central Information
Display (CID). Settings for the stationary cli- 1. "My MINI"
mate control and charging process are also 2. "Plan charging/climate control"
accepted for planned departure times. 3. "Settings charging current"
Setting the charging mode 4. "Level 1 (120V)"
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Settings are stored. When you change
charging locations you also might need to
1. "My MINI" change the setting for charging.
2. "Plan charging/climate control" Set the charge current strength at third-
3. Select the desired setting: party household sockets to the lowest level.
– "Charge immediately": the charging
process starts as soon as the charg- Stopping the charging process
ing cable is connected. The charging process can be stopped at any
time by removing the charging cable and
236
continued at a later time by connecting the Display Meaning

charging cable. This enables, for instance
the use of other loads on the power connec- Ring orange: the charging proc-
tion or prevents simultaneous high power ess is being prepared.
from multiple loads. Ring yellow animated: the
For removing the charging cable, refer to charging process is active or it
page 233. will start at the set time.
Ring yellow: the charging proc-
Continuing the charging process ess pauses.
If the charging process is interrupted, for Ring red: fault in the charging
instance through a temporary power failure, process.
the charging process is automatically con- Ring green: the charging proc-
tinued after the interruption. ess is completed.
End of charging time or set de-
Terminating the charging process parture time.
1. Remove the charging cable from the ve-
hicle, refer to page 233. DC charging active on a DC
2. Stow the charging cable as required. charging station.
3. Close the charging socket flap.
Departure time set.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Climate control activated at de-

Displays in the instrument parture time.
cluster Flashing: ventilation active.
The charge state indicator light, refer to
page 122, shows the charge state of the Flashing: heating active.
high-voltage battery in the instrument clus-
ter, if the standby state or drive-ready state
is switched on. If all bars are filled, the Flashing: cooling active.
high-voltage battery is fully charged.
Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage
system is still under high voltage.
Information regarding the charging process
is shown on the charging screen. Departure time
Concept
For optimum range and climate control, the
departure time can be set before parking
the vehicle.
237
General information 3. "Set departure time"

With a set departure time, the vehicle is Set departure times are displayed.
preheated or precooled during the charging 4. For example activate "Departure time 1".
process if climate control is set. Climate
Up to three departure times can be acti-
control output is reduced during the trip.
vated.
This increases the range during electric
driving. The set departure time will be deactivated,
if the departure time was ignored three
The following settings are possible for de-
times in a row.
parture time:
– Climate control for departure time.
– Scheduling of up to three regular depar- Climate control
ture times.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes The following settings for vehicle air condi-
can be made via the Central Information tioning are possible:
Display (CID). Settings for climate control
– Activate stationary climate control im-
and charging process are also applied for
mediately, refer to page 196.
scheduled departure times.
The range is reduced if stationary cli-
Climate control for departure time mate control is activated without a
charging cable connected.
– Planned climate control at the set depar-
1. "My MINI" ture time, refer to page 197.
2. "Plan charging/climate control" If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the
high-voltage battery may not be fully
3. "Precondition for departure"
charged at departure time.
Setting the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Discharged high-voltage and
1. "My MINI" vehicle battery
3. "Set departure time" General information
4. Set the desired days of the week, if In addition to the high-voltage battery, the
needed. vehicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which
is required for operation of the onboard
5. Set the desired time. electronics.
Up to three departure times can be set. With a discharged vehicle battery, no oper-
ation of the vehicle is possible.
Activating the departure time
1. "My MINI"
238
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Tire pressure specifications
This chapter describes all standard, country- In the tire inflation pressure table
specific and optional features offered with The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
the series. It also describes features and page 240, contains all tire inflation pres-
functions that are not necessarily available sure specifications for the specified tire
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire
tions or country versions. This also applies inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes
to safety-related functions and systems. approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle
When using these functions and systems, for the vehicle type.
the applicable laws and regulations must be To identify the correct tire inflation pres-
observed. sure, please note the following:
– Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure – Maximum speed for driving.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation General information
pressure influence the following: Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla-
– The service life of the tires. tion pressure increases with the tire tem-
– Road safety. perature.
– Driving comfort. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire
inflation pressure.
– Energy consumption.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
Safety information read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure

Warning specifications in the tire inflation
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure table
pressure may heat up significantly and The tire inflation pressure specifications in
sustain damage. This will have a negative the tire inflation pressure table only relate
impact on aspects of handling, such as to cold tires or tires at the same tempera-
steering and braking response. There is a ture as the ambient temperature.
risk of accident. Regularly check the tire
inflation pressure, and correct it as Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
needed, for instance twice a month and be- when the tires are cold, i.e.:
fore a long trip. – Driving distance of max.
1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.
– If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
239
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
1. Determine the intended tire inflation Tire pressure values

pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all COOPER SE
four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-
ample. Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the
actual tire inflation pressure deviates Specifications
from the intended tire inflation pres- in bar/PSI with
sure. cold tires
4. Check whether all valve caps are
screwed onto the tire valves. 195/55 R 16 87 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32
W
After correcting the tire inflation 195/55 R 16 87
pressure H M+S
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
205/45 R 17 88 2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset V XL A/S
the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
205/45 R 17 88
W XL
Tire pressures
205/45 R 17 88
To achieve optimum driving comfort, note V XL M+S
the tire inflation pressure specifications in
the Tire inflation pressure table, refer to 175/60 R 16 86 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
page 240, and adjust as needed. H XL M+S
These pressure values can also be found on 185/50 R 17 86
the tire inflation pressure label on the driv- H XL M+S
er's door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Tire identification marks
Tire size
205/45 R 17 84 V
205: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
240
Maximum tire load Manufacture date

Maximum tire load is the maximum permis- You can find the manufacture date of the
sible weight for which the tire is approved. tire on the tire's sidewall.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire Designation Manufacture date
sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
– GAWR – on the certification label on the DOT … 0121 1st week 2021
driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by
1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the Uniform Tire Quality Grading
vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating – Quality grades can be found where applica-
GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire ble on the tire sidewall between tread
loads, respectively. shoulder and maximum section width.
Speed letter E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
ture A
Designation Maximum speed
DOT Quality Grades
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h Treadwear
R up to 106 mph/170 km/h Traction AA A B C
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h Temperature A B C
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h these grades.
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
Treadwear
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
Tire Identification Number specified government test course. E.g., a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0121 half, 1 g, times as well on the government
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand course as a tire graded 100. The relative
xxx: tire size and tire design performance of tires depends upon the ac-
tual conditions of their use, however, and
0121: tire age
may depart significantly from the norm due
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines to variations in driving habits, service prac-
of the U.S. Department of Transportation. tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Tire age
Traction
Recommendation The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at are AA, A, B, and C.
least every 6 years. Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
241
controlled conditions on specified govern- M+S

ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
A tire marked C may have poor traction per-
weather performance than summer tires.
formance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction Tire tread
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics. Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
Temperature 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-
The temperature grades are A, the highest, creased risk of hydroplaning.
B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to Winter tires
dissipate heat when tested under controlled Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can for winter operation.
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera- Minimum tread depth
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning
Wear indicators are distributed around the
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tire's circumference and have the legally re-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
quired minimum height of 0.063 in-
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-
ches/1.6 mm.
derinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause The positions of the wear indicators are
heat buildup and possible tire failure. marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 245, are labeled
with a circular icon containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
242
Tire damage center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed

or transported as needed. Do not repair
damaged tires, but have them replaced.
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for-
eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread Warning
wear.
Tires can become damaged by driving over
Driving over rough or damaged road surfa- obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta- high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller
cles can cause serious damage to wheels, tire cross-section. The smaller the tire
tires and suspension parts. This is more cross-section, the higher the risk of tire
likely to occur with low-profile tires, which damage. There is a danger of accidents and
provide less cushioning between the wheel property damage. If possible, avoid driving
and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz- over objects or road conditions that may
ards and reduce your speed, especially if damage tires, or drive over them slowly
your vehicle is equipped with low-profile and carefully.
tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle
malfunctions:
– Unusual vibrations. Changing wheels and tires
– Unusual tire or running noises.
– Unusual handling such as a strong ten- Mounting and wheel balancing
dency to pull to the left or right. Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc-
Damage can be caused by the following sit- ing carried out by a dealer’s service center
uations, for instance: or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
– Driving over curbs.
– Road damage. MINI Electric Light-Alloy Power Spoke
– Tire inflation pressure too low. 2-Tone
– Vehicle overloading.
– Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-
A balancing weight is required for wheel
age is suspected while driving,
balancing.
immediately reduce speed and stop. Have
wheels and tires checked. For this pur- The balancing weight is available as a spe-
pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s cial tool from a dealer’s service center, an-
243
other qualified service center or repair combination remounted on the vehicle as

shop. soon as possible.
Have wheel balancing executed exclusively
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Recommended tire brands
Wheel and tire combination

General information
You can ask the dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop about the correct wheel/tire combina-
tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information For each tire size, the manufacturer of the

vehicle recommends certain tire brands.
The tire brands can be identified by a star
Warning
on the tire sidewall.
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the
vehicle, for instance due to contact with New tires
the body due to tolerances despite the Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
same official size rating. There is a risk of turing circumstances when tires are brand-
an accident. The manufacturer of your ve- new; they achieve their full traction poten-
hicle strongly suggests that you use tial after a break-in time.
wheels and tires that have been recom- Drive conservatively for the first
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for 200 miles/300 km.
your vehicle type.
Retreaded tires
Warning
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will
have a negative impact on the vehicle's Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-
handling and on the function of a variety ing structures. With advanced age the
of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak- service life can be limited. There is a risk
ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con- of an accident. The manufacturer of your
trol. There is a risk of accident. To main- vehicle does not recommend the use of re-
tain good handling and vehicle response, treaded tires.
use only tires with a single tread configu-
ration from a single manufacturer. The The manufacturer of the vehicle does not
manufacturer of the vehicle recommends recommend the use of retreaded tires.
that you use wheels and tires that have
been recommended by the vehicle manu-
facturer for your vehicle type. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel/tire
244
Winter tires Storing tires

Winter tires are recommended for operat-
ing on winter roads. Tire inflation pressure
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro- Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
vide better winter traction than summer pressure indicated on the side wall of the
tires, they usually do not provide the same tire.
level of performance as winter tires.
Storage
Maximum speed of winter tires Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is dark place.
higher than the permissible speed for the Always protect tires against all contact with
winter tires, then attach a label showing the oil, grease, and solvents.
permissible maximum speed in the field of Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
view. The label is available from a dealer's
service center or another qualified service Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do
not exceed the permissible maximum speed. Run-flat tires
Changing runflat tires Concept

When changing from run-flat tires to stand- Run-flat tires permit continued driving un-
ard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle der restricted conditions even in the event
contains a compact spare tire ("donut") or of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
tire mobility kit. Further information is
available from a dealer's service center or General information
another qualified service center or repair The wheels are composed of tires that are
shop. self-supporting to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire
Rotating wheels between axles to remain drivable to a restricted degree in
Different wear patterns can occur on the the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
front and rear axles depending on individual Follow the instructions for continued driv-
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated ing with a flat tire.
in pairs between the axles to achieve even
wear. Further information is available from
a dealer's service center or another qualified Safety information
service center or repair shop. After rotating,
check the tire pressure and correct, if Warning
needed. The vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-
ity when braking, braking distances are
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
245
moderately and do not exceed a speed of Mobility System

50 mph/80 km/h.
Concept
Label With the Mobility System, minor tire dam-
age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-
tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is
pumped into the tires, which seals the dam-
age from the inside.
General information
– Follow the instructions on using the
Mobility System found on the compres-
sor and sealant container.
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall – Use of the Mobility System may be inef-
with RSC Run-flat System Component. fective if the tire puncture measures ap-
prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
– Contact a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
Repairing a flat tire shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
– Do not remove foreign bodies that have
Safety measures penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
– Park the vehicle as far away as possible objects if they are visibly protruding
from passing traffic and on solid ground. from the tire.
– Switch on the hazard warning system. – Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away ant container and apply it to the steer-
by setting the parking brake. ing wheel.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front – The use of a sealant can damage the
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi- TPM wheel electronics. In this case,
tion and engage the steering wheel lock. have the TPM wheel electronics re-
placed at the next opportunity.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out- – The compressor can be used to check
side the immediate area in a safe place, the tire inflation pressure.
such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle Overview
at an appropriate distance.
Storage
The Mobility System is in a bag on the right
side of the cargo area.
246
Sealant container – Secure the vehicle against rolling away

by setting the parking brake.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
– Sealant container, arrow 1. at an appropriate distance.
– Filling hose, arrow 2.
Filling the tire with sealant
Observe use-by date on the sealant con-
tainer. Safety information
Compressor NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of dam-
damage. Do not run the compressor for
more than 10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
– Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
247
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the 5. With the compressor switched off, in-
cover of the sealant container. Do not sert the connector into the power socket
kink the hose. in the vehicle interior.
3. Slide the sealant container into the 6. With standby state or drive-ready state
holder on the compressor housing, en- switched on, switch on the compressor.
suring that it engages audibly.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con- to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tainer onto the tire valve of the non- tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
working wheel. While the tire is being filled with sealant,
the tire inflation pressure may sporadically
reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the
compressor at this point.
Checking and adjusting the tire

inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the
tire pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-
sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
248
Removing and stowing the sealant If a tire inflation pressure of at least

container 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your
dealer's service center or another quali-
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant
fied service center or repair shop.
container from the tire valve.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2. Press the red unlocking device.
2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-
3. Remove the sealant container from the tion pressure is reached.
compressor. 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in compressor from the tire valve.
suitable material to avoid dirtying the 7. Pull the connector out of the power
cargo area. socket in the vehicle interior.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
reached
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
1. Pull the connector out of the power reached
socket in the vehicle interior.
1. Unscrew the connection hose of the
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to compressor from the tire valve.
distribute the sealant in the tire.
2. Pull the connector out of the power
3. Screw the connection hose of the com- socket in the vehicle interior.
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx.
5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant
is evenly distributed in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less
than 12 mph/20 km/h.
4. Insert the connector into the power Adjustment

socket in the vehicle interior. 1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
5. With standby state or drive-ready state

switched on, switch on the compressor.
249
3. Insert the connector into the power Follow the tire chain manufacturer's in-
socket in the vehicle interior. structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting tire chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
after mounting tire chains, as doing so may
result in incorrect readings.
When driving with tire chains, briefly acti-
vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if
needed.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar. Safety information
– Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state or drive-ready state, Warning
switch on the compressor. With the mounting of tire chains on un-
– Reduce tire inflation pressure: press suitable tires, the tire chains can come
the button on the compressor. into contact with vehicle parts. There may
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the be a risk of accident or risk of damage to
compressor from the tire valve. property. Only mount tire chains on tires
that are designated by their manufacturer
6. Pull the connector out of the power
as suitable for the use of tire chains.
socket in the vehicle interior.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Warning
Continuing the trip
Insufficiently tight tire chains may dam-
Do not exceed the maximum permissible age tires and vehicle components. There
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. may be a risk of accident or risk of damage
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to to property. Make sure that the tire chains
page 153. are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to needed according to the tire chain manu-
page 148. facturer's instructions.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly. Fine-link tire chains
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
Tire chains mends the use of fine-link tire chains. Cer-
tain types of fine-link tire chains have been
tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle
General information and recommended as road-safe and suitable.
The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter- Information regarding suitable tire chains is
mined certain wheels and tires to be suita- available from a dealer’s service center or
ble for operation on the vehicle.
250

shop. DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under the
Use vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip- hicle jack to bear weight. They have the
ped with the tires of the following size: potential to exert too much strain on the
– 175/60 R 16. vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the
vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or
– 185/50 R 17. danger to life. Do not place supports under
the vehicle jack.
Maximum speed with tire chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using tire chains. Warning
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-
turer, is provided in order to perform a
Changing wheels/tires wheel change in the event of a breakdown.
The jack is not designed for frequent use;
General information for example, changing from summer to
winter tires. Using the jack frequently may
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
cause it to become jammed or damaged.
wheel does not always need to be changed
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage
immediately when there is a loss of tire in-
to property. Only use the jack to attach an
flation pressure due to a flat tire.
emergency or spare wheel in the event of
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are a breakdown.
available as accessories from a dealer’s
Warning
Safety information On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-
ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If
DANGER possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,
The vehicle jack is only provided for short- and slip-resistant surface.
term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are
observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi- Warning
cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. the vehicle and for the jacking points on
When the vehicle is raised with the vehi- the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.
cle jack, do not lie under the vehicle and Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using
do not switch on the drive-ready state. the vehicle jack.
251
On a level surface
Warning
When the vehicle jack is not inserted into
the jacking point provided for this pur-
pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the
vehicle jack may slip when it is being
cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted
in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects
in front and behind the wheel that is diago-
nal to the wheel to be changed.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are On a slight downhill gradient
exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. While the ve-
hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces
on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-
cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning If you need to change a wheel on a slight

Incorrect handling of the vehicle jack can downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
damage the vehicle's underbody and ex- able objects, for instance rocks, under the
pose high-voltage components. There is a wheels of both the front and rear axles
risk of injury or risk of damage to prop- against the rolling direction.
erty. When cranking up the vehicle jack,
ensure that it is inserted in the jacking
point next to the wheel housing. Make Preparing the vehicle
sure not to damage any of the underbody – Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
paneling parts. ground at a safe distance from traffic.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
Securing the vehicle against rolling – Set the parking brake.
– Engage a gear or move the selector lever
General information to position P.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to – As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
additionally secure the vehicle against roll- have all vehicle occupants get out of the
ing away when changing a wheel. vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
252
side the immediate area in a safe place, 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
such as behind a guardrail. row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank
– Depending on the vehicle equipment, or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
get wheel change tools and, if necessary,
the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
or portable hazard warning light at an
appropriate distance.
– Secure the vehicle additionally against
rolling.
– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-
gular recess of the jacking point closest
to the wheel to be changed.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are

located at the marked positions.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the
Jacking up the vehicle vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of
injury. Comply with the described hand
position and do not change this position
while using the vehicle jack.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle

jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under
load and continue turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever with one hand.
253
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts
stands vertically and at a right angle be- and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-
neath the jacking point. wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-
clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and
lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-
curely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The
tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
stands vertically and perpendicularly be- area, if necessary.
neath the jacking point after extending
the vehicle jack. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of
its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next
opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are
tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle nearest dealer's service center or an-
jack is with the entire surface on the other qualified service center or repair
ground and the relevant wheel is maxi- shop.
mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as re-
quired.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel
on and screw in at least two lug bolts in
a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the
accompanying lug bolts may have to be
used as well.
254
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Jump-starting, negative terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Coolant reservoir
3 Jump-starting, positive terminal
255
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Hood
Warning
Safety information Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
Warning of the hood is clear during opening and
Improperly executed work in the engine closing.
compartment can damage vehicle compo-
nents and impair vehicle functions. There
is a risk of an accident and damage to NOTICE
property. Have work in the engine com- Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
partment performed by a dealer’s service the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
center or another qualified service center age to property, among other potential
or repair shop. damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
Warning hood.
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components
in the engine compartment can also move NOTICE
with the vehicle switched off, for instance When the hood is closed, it must engage
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. on both sides. Pressing again can damage
Do not reach into the area of moving parts. the hood. There is a risk of damage to
Keep articles of clothing and hair away property, among other potential damage.
from moving parts. Open the hood again and then close it en-
ergetically. Avoid pressing again.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance Opening the hood
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
There is a risk of injury. If the hood is Hood is unlocked.
open, pay attention to protruding parts
and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-
rectly close the hood.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
256
Engine compartment MOBILITY
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
257
MOBILITY Coolant
Coolant
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-
specific and optional features offered with tives can damage the drive system. There
the series. It also describes features and is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
functions that are not necessarily available property. Do not allow additives to come
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- into contact with skin, eyes or articles of
tions or country versions. This also applies clothing. Use suitable additives only.
the applicable laws and regulations must be NOTICE
observed. Loss of coolant may damage the drive sys-
tem. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure
General information that there is sufficient coolant in the res-
ervoir at all times. Always have coolant
Coolant consists of water and additives. added by a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
Not all commercially available additives are
shop.
suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi-
tives of different colors. Observe the water -
additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information
about suitable additives is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Coolant level
service center or repair shop.
Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
Safety information coolant reservoir.
1. Allow the drive system to cool down.
Warning 2. Open the hood, refer to page 256.
With the drive system hot and the cooling 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
system open, coolant can escape and lead slightly counterclockwise to allow any
to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only
open the cooling system with the drive
system cooled down.
258
Coolant MOBILITY
excess pressure to dissipate, then open

it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be-
tween the minimum and maximum
marks in the filler neck.
6. Close the lid.

When the coolant level is low, check the
cooling system and add coolant. Have the
cooling system checked and coolant added
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environ-
mental protection regulations when
disposing of coolant and coolant ad-
ditives.
259
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that the work on the vehicle, in par-
ticular maintenance and repair, be per-
This chapter describes all standard, country- formed by a dealer’s service center or
specific and optional features offered with another qualified service center or repair
the series. It also describes features and shop.
to safety-related functions and systems. Condition Based Service CBS
observed. Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac-
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
MINI maintenance system CBS uses these to provide maintenance rec-
ommendations.
The maintenance system provides service The system makes it possible to adapt the
notifications and thereby provides support amount of maintenance corresponding to
in maintaining road safety and the opera- your user profile.
tional reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the General information
maintenance system may vary according to Information on service notifications, refer
the country version. Replacement work, to page 128, can be displayed on the Control
spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear Display.
materials are calculated separately. Further
information is available from a dealer's serv- Service data in the vehicle key
ice center or another qualified service cen-
Information on the service notifications is
ter or repair shop.
continuously stored in the vehicle key. The
service center can read this data out and
suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi-
Safety information cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-
hicle key with which the vehicle was driven
DANGER most recently.
Improperly performed work, in particular
maintenance and repair on the high-volt- Storage periods
age system, can lead to electric shock. Storage periods during which the vehicle
There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to battery was disconnected are not taken into
life. account.
260
Maintenance MOBILITY
Have a dealer's service center or another Safety information

qualified service center or repair shop up-
date the time-dependent maintenance pro-
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and NOTICE
changing the microfilter/activated-charcoal The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
filter. tricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-
Maintenance Manual and tem. Improper use of the socket for On-
board Diagnosis, or contact with the
Service and Warranty Infor- socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other
mation Booklet for US models than its intended purpose, can cause vehi-
and Warranty and Service cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-
sonal and property damage. Given the fore-
Guide Booklet for Canadian going, the manufacture of your vehicle
models strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to
Please consult your Maintenance Manual a dealer's service center or another quali-
and Service and Warranty Information fied service center or repair shop or other
Booklet for US models and Warranty and persons that have the specialized training
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models and equipment for purposes of properly
for additional information on the perform- utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
ance of service and maintenance work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- Position
mends that maintenance and repair be per-
formed by a service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. Records
of regular maintenance and repair work
should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-

nosis
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side
General information for checking the primary components in the
Devices connected to the OBD socket trig- vehicle's emissions.
ger the alarm system when the vehicle is
locked. Remove any devices connected at
the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.
261
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Wiper blades
This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information
functions that are not necessarily available NOTICE
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- The window may sustain damage if the
tions or country versions. This also applies wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade
to safety-related functions and systems. installed. There is a risk of damage to
When using these functions and systems, property, among other potential damage.
the applicable laws and regulations must be Hold the wiper firmly when changing the
observed. wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the
wiper without a wiper blade installed.
Vehicle tool kit

NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
hood.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Replacing the front wiper blades
onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
right side under the cargo floor panel or in a wiper arms.
bag on the right side of the cargo area. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
After use, secure the bag with the onboard 3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.
vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
262
Replacing components MOBILITY
4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the Light and bulb replacement
holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contri-
bution to vehicle safety.
Except for the reversing light, all headlights
and lights are designed in LED technology.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder mends that you have appropriate work per-
of the wiper arm, arrow 2. formed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re- if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not
verse order. been described here.
7. Fold down the wiper arm. A spare light box is available from a dealer's
Replacing the rear wiper blade center or repair shop.
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. Follow the safety information, refer to
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back. page 263.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes are re-
lated to conventional lasers and are offi-
cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 263.
3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten-
ing by continuing to turn it all the way. Safety information
4. Insert the new wiper blade by following
the steps in reverse order. The wiper Lights and bulbs
blade must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm. Warning
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There
is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after
they have cooled off.
263
Tail lights, bulb replacement

Warning
Work on switched-on lighting systems can Overview
cause short circuits. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. When
working on the lighting system, switch off
the lights in question. If necessary, heed
the bulb manufacturer's instructions.
NOTICE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of damage to property, 1 Side tail lights
among other potential damage. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use 2 Rear fog lights
a clean cloth or something similar, or hold 3 License plate light
the bulb by its base. 4 Center brake light
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Side tail lights
Warning
Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-
age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the head-
lights or other light sources. Do not re-
move the LED covers.
Headlight glass 1 Tail lights

Condensation can form on the inside of the 2 Turn signals/brake lights
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. 3 Turn signals/brake lights
When driving with the lights switched on,
4 Reversing lights
the condensation evaporates after a short
time. The headlight glass does not need to
be changed. Side tail lights
If despite driving with the headlights Follow the general instructions on lights
switched on, increasing humidity forms, for and bulbs, refer to page 263.
instance water droplets in the light, have Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.
the headlights checked.
264
Replacing components MOBILITY
1. Open the tailgate. Central brake light and license plate

lights
2. Remove left or right cover.
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 263.
The lights feature LED technology. In the
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's
Vehicle battery
3. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing
light, arrow, counterclockwise and re- General information
move it. In addition to the high-voltage battery, the
vehicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery. The
vehicle battery supplies the onboard elec-
tronics with energy.
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be
requested from a dealer's service center or
shop.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open- Safety information

ing.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into DANGER
the socket, turn counterclockwise and Contact with live components can lead to
remove. an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
components that are under voltage.
Warning
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair
vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-
cident and damage to property. Only vehi-
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert cle batteries that are compatible with your
the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. vehicle type should be installed in your ve-
Make sure that the bulb holder engages hicle. Information on compatible vehicle
in all fasteners.
265
batteries is available at your dealer’s serv- Fuses

ice center.
Safety information
Register the battery to the vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- Warning
mends that you have a service center or an- Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
other qualified service center or repair shop electrical lines and components. There is a
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a
after the battery has been replaced. Once blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking
the battery has been registered again, all fuse with a substitute of another color or
comfort features will be available without amperage rating.
restriction and any Check Control messages
displayed which relate to comfort features
will disappear. Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the glove compart-
Charging the battery ment.
A charger that is installed in the vehicle
supplies the vehicle battery with power. 1. Open the glove compartment.
The charger receives the necessary energy 2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
from the high-voltage battery, refer to
page 230.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs
to be newly initialized or individual settings
updated, for example:
– Memory function: store the positions
again.
– Time: update. Information on the fuse types and locations,
– Date: update. as well as the positions of any other fuse
– Glass sunroof: initialize the system. boxes, is available on the Internet:
www.mini.com/fusecard.
Disposing of old batteries Where applicable, information on the fuse
types and locations is also found on a sepa-
Have old batteries disposed of by a rate sheet in the fuse box.
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair Replacing fuses
shop or take them to a collection point.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
Maintain the filled battery in an upright po- you have a dealer's service center or an-
sition for transport and storage. Secure the other qualified service center or repair shop
battery so that it does not tip over during replace the fuses.
transport.
266
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Warning triangle
observed. The warning triangle is located in the tail-
gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.
Hazard warning flashers
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service
life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
The button is located above the Control Dis- Storage
play.
Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in
The red light in the button flashes when the the cargo area.
hazard warning flashers are activated.
MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept
MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted
if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
267
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
General information You can launch Teleservice Help by re-

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- questing it through the Service Specialist.
hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man- 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
ufacturer.
2. Set the parking brake.
There are various ways of making contact.
3. Control Display is switched on.
– Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 123. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
– Calling with a mobile phone. The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-
stored for specific functions.
Requirements If this is not possible, further measures will
be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-
– Active MINI Connected contract or
tance will be informed.
equipment version with intelligent
emergency call.
– Cellular network reception. Emergency Call
– Standby state is switched on.
Starting Intelligent emergency call

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, Concept
support is offered through Teleservice Diag-
nosis. In case of an emergency, an emergency call
can be triggered automatically by the sys-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): tem or manually.
1. "MINI Connected"
General information
2. "MINI Assist"
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a
The contact to the Roadside Assistance connection with the MINI Response Center.
of the manufacture is established.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Call
A telephone number is displayed, if cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
needed. Select to dial the telephone conditions.
number on a connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is
important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice
Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of
the vehicle via wireless transmission.
268
Overview The MINI Response Center then makes

contact with you and takes further steps
to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
MINI Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum-
stances.
For this purpose, data that serves to de-
termine the necessary rescue measures,
for instance the current position of the
vehicle when it can be determined, is
SOS button in the roofliner
transmitted to the MINI Response Cen-
ter.
Functional requirements If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-
– Standby state is switched on. sponse Center through the loudspeakers,
– The Assist system is functional. the hands-free system, for instance, may
be broken. However, the MINI Response
– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli- Center may still be able to hear you.
gent emergency call: the SIM card
integrated in the vehicle has been acti- The MINI Response Center ends the emer-
vated. gency call.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for instance if the
Jump-starting
airbags trigger, an emergency call is auto-
matically initiated immediately after an ac- General information
cident of corresponding severity. Automatic Have only a dealer’s service center or an-
Collision Notification is not affected by other qualified service center or repair shop
pressing the SOS button. perform the jump start.
Manual triggering Safety Instruction
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at DANGER
the button lights up green.
Contact with live components can lead to
– The LED is illuminated green when an an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
emergency call has been initiated. ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
If the situation allows, wait in your vehi- components that are under voltage.
cle until the voice connection has been
established.
– The LED flashes green when a connec-
tion to the MINI Response Center has
been established.
269
Towing There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage.
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
Transporting the vehicle
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
General information tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
parts.
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There
is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when Towing other vehicles
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property, General information
among other potential damage. Switch on the hazard warning system, de-
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means. pending on local regulations.
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its If the electrical system has failed, clearly
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension identify the vehicle being towed by placing
parts. a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-
dow.
Pushing the vehicle Safety information
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, push it for a short distance at a
speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h. Warning
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
page 105. towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle
to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or
it will not be possible to control the vehi-
Tow truck
cle's response. There is a risk of accident.
Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of
NOTICE the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve-
The vehicle can become damaged when hicle to be towed.
lifting and securing it.
270
Tow fitting
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in- General information
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts
can occur. There is a risk of damage to
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to
the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
The screw-in tow fitting should always be
Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-
carried in the vehicle.
ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-
low the following: The tow fitting can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the vehicle.
– Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners. The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool
kit, refer to page 262, are together in the
– The tow bar will generate lateral forces
cargo area.
if it is secured with an offset.
Use of the tow fitting:
Tow rope – Use only the tow fitting provided with
Observe the following notes when using the the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
tow rope: – Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
– Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en- roads only.
able the vehicle to be towed without – Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,
jerking. for instance do not lift the vehicle by the
– Make sure the tow rope is not twisted tow fitting.
when fastening. – Check the fastening of the tow fitting in
– Check the fastening of the tow fitting regular intervals.
and tow rope in regular intervals.
– Do not exceed a towing speed of Safety information
30 mph/50 km/h.
– Do not exceed a towing distance of NOTICE
3 miles/5 km.
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
– When starting to tow the vehicle, make there may be damage to the vehicle or to
sure that the tow rope is taut. the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential dam-
age. Follow the notes on using the tow fit-
ting.
271
Screw thread for tow fitting General information

After an accident, comply with the follow-
ing safety precautions with regard to the
high-voltage system:
– Secure the crash site.
– Immediately notify rescue forces, police,
or firefighters of the fact that your vehi-
cle is equipped with a high-voltage sys-
tem.
– Engage selector lever position P, set the
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo- parking brake, and switch off the
cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on standby state and drive-ready state.
the right side with respect to the direction – Lock the vehicle after exiting.
of travel.
– Do not inhale any gases escaping from
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover the high-voltage battery; if needed,
to push it out. maintain a safe distance from the vehi-
cle.
What to do after an accident
Safety information
Warning
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. After an accident, do
not touch any high-voltage components
such as orange colored high-voltage cables
or parts that are in contact with exposed
high-voltage cables.
Warning
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor-
rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not
touch fluids escaping from the high-volt-
age battery.
272
Care MOBILITY
Care
NOTICE
This chapter describes all standard, country- When washing, water can get into the
specific and optional features offered with open charging socket. There is a risk of
the series. It also describes features and damage to property, among other potential
functions that are not necessarily available damage. Close the charging socket flap
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- while washing.
When using these functions and systems, Steam jets or high-pressure
the applicable laws and regulations must be washers
observed.
Safety information
Washing the vehicle NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure wash-
General information ers, components can be damaged due to
Regularly remove foreign objects such as the pressure or temperatures being too
leaves in the area below the windshield high. There is a risk of damage to property,
when the hood is raised. among other potential damage. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly
long continuously. Follow the operating
in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can
instructions for the high-pressure washer.
damage the vehicle.
Safety information Distances and temperature

– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
Warning – Minimum distance from sensors, cam-
Contact with live components can lead to eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
an electric shock. High voltage is present – Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
at the charging connection. There is a risk 31.5 in/80 cm.
of injury or danger to life.
– Minimum distance from the charging
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- socket flap: 31.5 in/80 cm.
mends that work on the charging connec-
tion, for instance cleaning, be performed
273
MOBILITY Care
Automatic washing systems or car Some car washes do not permit persons in
washes the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked
from the outside when in selector lever po-
Safety information sition N. A signal is sounded when an at-
tempt is made to lock the vehicle.
NOTICE Driving out of a car wash

Using a car wash with high pressure wash- Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
ers may result in water penetration of win- For activating drive-ready state, refer to
dow areas. There is a risk of damage to page 103.
Do not drive into high-pressure car wash
systems.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not
use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
NOTICE Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-
stance from insects, with shampoo and
Improper use of automatic washing sys-
wash off with water.
tems or car washes can cause damage to
the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
property, among other potential damage. ice scraper.
Follow the following instructions:
– Give preference to cloth car washes After washing the vehicle
or those that use soft brushes in or- After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
der to avoid paint damage. briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac-
– Do not drive through a car wash with tion can be reduced. The heat generated
guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to during braking dries brake discs and brake
avoid damage to the chassis. pads and protects them against corrosion.
– Observe the tire width of the guide Completely remove all residues on the win-
rail to avoid damage to tires and rims. dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam- wiper blade wear.
age to the exterior mirrors.
– Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the
rod antenna breaking off. Vehicle care
– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-
sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to
the wiper system.
Vehicle care products
General information
Driving into a car wash MINI recommends using vehicle care and
In car washes, the vehicle must be able to cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
roll freely. products are available from a dealer’s serv-
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to ice center or another qualified service cen-
page 103. ter or repair shop.
274
Care MOBILITY
Safety information Clean light-colored leather more frequently

because soiling on such surfaces is substan-
tially more visible.
Warning
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt
Cleansers can contain substances that are and grease will gradually break down the
dangerous and harmful to your health. protective layer of the leather surface.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning
the interior, open the doors or windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning
Upholstery material care
vehicles. Follow the instructions on the
container. General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a
vacuum cleaner.
Vehicle paint If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro-
General information fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Regular care contributes to driving safety Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-
and value retention. Environmental influen- ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing
ces in areas with elevated air pollution or the material vigorously.
natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Safety information
Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-
hicle care to these influences.
NOTICE
Corrosive substances such as oil, grease or
bird droppings, must be removed immedi- Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
ately to prevent the finish from being al- clothing can damage the seat covers.
tered or discolored. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Ensure
Matte finish that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Only use cleaning and care products suita-
ble for vehicles with matte finish. Caring for special components
Leather care Light-alloy wheels
Remove dust from the leather regularly, us- When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner. wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in- steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the
creased wear and premature degradation of manufacturer's instructions.
the leather surface. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
To guard against discoloration, such as from agents can destroy the protective layer of
clothing, clean leather and provide leather adjacent components, such as the brake
care roughly every two months. disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to
dry them. The heat generated during brak-
275
MOBILITY Care
ing dries brake discs and brake pads and Safety belts
protects them against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
Carefully clean components such as the ra-
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of
diator grille or door handles with plenty of
the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries
water, if necessary, with shampoo added,
or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol-
particularly when they have been exposed
ution for cleaning the safety belts.
to road salt.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action
Rubber components
and thus have a negative impact on safety.
Environmental influences can cause surface
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.
safety belts clipped into their buckles.
Use only water and suitable cleaning agents
for cleaning. Safety belts should only be allowed to re-
tract if they are dry.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-
ber care agents at regular intervals. When
cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili- Carpets and floor mats
con-containing vehicle care products in or-
der to avoid damage or noises. Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
Fine wood parts the pedal distance or block a depressed
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com- pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
with a soft cloth. cured and cannot enter into the driver's
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
Plastic components for the vehicle and can be safely attached
to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor mats. Make
NOTICE sure that there is sufficient clearance for
Cleaning agents that contain alcohol or the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy- securely fastened again after they were re-
duty grease removers, fuel and such, can moved, for instance for cleaning.
damage plastic parts. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential Floor mats can be removed from the car's
damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth. interior for cleaning.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with
needed.
a microfiber cloth and water or a textile
cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,
Clean with a microfiber cloth. rub back and forth in the direction of travel
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if only.
needed.
Do not soak the roofliner.
276
Care MOBILITY
Sensor/camera lenses General information

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a Your dealer's service center or another
cloth moistened with a small amount of qualified service center or repair shop can
glass detergent. advise you on what to consider when stor-
ing the vehicle for longer than three
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses months.
Safety information
NOTICE
Chemical cleaning agents, moisture or flu-
ids of any kind can damage the surface of NOTICE
displays and screens. There is a risk of The high-voltage battery can be damaged
damage to property, among other potential if left uncharged or with low charge for ex-
damage. Clean with a clean, antistatic mi- tended periods. There is a risk of damage
crofiber cloth. to property, among other potential dam-
age. Before storing the vehicle for an ex-
tended period, ensure that the high-volt-
NOTICE age battery is fully charged. During the
idle period, connect the vehicle to a charg-
The surface of displays can be damaged ing station at a compatible charging loca-
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of tion. If necessary, the high-voltage battery
damage to property, among other potential will be charged automatically. Make sure
damage. Avoid pressure that is too high that charging is carried out. Regularly
and do not use any scratching materials. check the charge state.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for lon-
cloth. ger than four weeks with a charge state
below approx. 80 %.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens
of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-
fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-
fer to page 134.
High-voltage battery, long

stationary periods
Concept
For idle phases that last several weeks, park
the vehicle with the high-voltage battery
fully charged, if possible.
Do not park the vehicle for longer than
14 days if the electric range is exhausted.
With storage times of up to three months, if
possible plug the vehicle into a compatible
power source or park it with the high-volt-
age battery as fully charged as possible.
277
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the values can be found in the approval docu-
Owner's Manual are used as guidance val- ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-
ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate tained from a dealer’s service center or an-
from this, for instance due to the selected other qualified service center or repair
special equipment, country version or coun- shop.
try-specific measurement method. Detailed
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can
model version, equipment or country-spe- deviate, for instance due to the selected
cific measurement method. special equipment, tires, load and chassis
The specified heights do not take into ac- version.
count attached parts, for instance a roof an-
MINI Cooper SE
Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928
Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727
Height in/mm 56.4/1,432
Length in/mm 151.7/3,854
Wheelbase in/mm 98.2/2,495
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.1/10.7
278
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
MINI Cooper SE
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,913/1,775
Load lbs/kg 743/337
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,172/985
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,929/875
279
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the
vehicle are listed here.
Updates made after the edito-

rial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
the editorial deadline for the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
– Overview: safety of the high-voltage sys-
tem.
– Operation: opening and closing: vehicle
key: safety Instructions.
– Operation: opening and closing: vehicle
key: change battery: note.
– Operation: seats, mirrors and steering
wheel: seats and head restraints: safety
belts: general.
In contrast to the description in the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle,
the MINI FindMate equipment is not availa-
ble.
280
Appendix REFERENCE
281
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Arrival time 132
Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic Pedes-
ABS Antilock Braking System 168 trian Protection 108
Accelerator pedal positions 107 Ash tray 204
Accessories and parts 8 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off
Accident, what to do 272 assistant 171
ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 173 Assistance with breakdown 267
Acoustic Pedestrian Protection 108 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
AC quick charging cable, see Mode 3 charg- Entertainment and Communication 6
ing cable 232 Automatic car wash 273
Activated charcoal filter 196 Automatic climate control 193
Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-
cruise control 173 ror 95
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 155 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-
Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa- ger airbags 146
tion Display (CID) 40 Automatic deactivation of the high-voltage
Adjustments, steering wheel 96 system 66
Advance climate control, see Stationary cli- Automatic headlight control 139
mate control 196 Automatic locking 80
Airbags 144 Automatic unlocking 80
Airbags, indicator and warning light 146 AUTO program, automatic climate con-
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air trol 194
mode 195 AUTO program, intensity 195
air conditioning, climate 194 Average consumption 132
Air distribution, manual 195 Average speed 132
Air drying, see air conditioning 194 Axle loads, approved 279
Air flow, automatic climate control 195
Air outlets, see Ventilation 196 B
Air pressure, tires 239
Alarm signal, high-voltage battery 65 Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 88
Alarm system 81 Backrest, seats 87
Alarm triggering 81 Bad weather light 141
Alarm, unintentional 82 Battery, charge state indicator 122
All-season tires, see Winter tires 245 Battery, disposing of 266
Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46 Battery high-voltage system, long stationary
Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 119 periods 277
Antilock Braking System ABS 168 Battery, vehicle 265
Anti-slip control, see DSC 168 Being towed, see Towing 270
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Belts, see Safety belts 90
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Beverage holder, see Cup holders 212
282
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Bluetooth connection 53 Center console 34

Bottle holder, see Cup holders 212 Central Information Display (CID) 36
Brake assistant 168 Central Information Display (CID), see Con-
Brake discs, break-in 220 trol Display 38
Brake pads, break-in 220 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 134
Braking, information 221 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-
Breakdown assistance 267 side 74
Breaking in 220 Central screen, see Control Display 38
Brightness, Control Display 49 Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Bulb replacement 263 Safety 8
Bulb replacement, rear 264 Changing parts 262
Bulbs and lights 263 Changing wheels 251
Buttons on the steering wheel 32 Changing, wheels and tires 243
Button, SOS 268 Charge state indicator of the high-voltage
Button, Start/Stop 102 battery 122
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 269 Charging cable, storing, see Storage 233
Charging screen 121
C Charging, see Charging the vehicle 230
Charging, see Vehicle charging 230
California Proposition 65 Warning 9 Charging smartphone, see Wireless charg-
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel- ing tray 206
ligent Safety 155 Charging status, see Display of the charging
Camera-based cruise control 173 status 235
Camera lenses, care 277 Charging the battery, see Vehicle charg-
Camera, rearview camera 184 ing 230
Can holder, see Cup holders 212 Charging the vehicle 230
Care 273 Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charg-
Care, light-alloy wheels 275 ing 230
Care of displays, screens 277 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wire-
Care, vehicle 274 less charging tray 206
Cargo area 213 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
Cargo area, adapting size 217 number 13
Cargo area, enlarging 215 Check Control 123
Cargo area lid 76 Children, seating position 97
Cargo area, storage compartments 215 Children, transporting safely 97
Cargo cover 214 Child restraint system 97
Cargo position, rear seat backrest 215 Child restraint system LATCH 100
Cargo, stowing and securing 213 Child restraint systems, mounting 98
Cargo straps 214 Child seat, mounting 98
Carpet, care 276 Child seats 97
Car wash 273 Chrome parts, care 276
Car wash, automatic 273 Cigarette lighter 204
CBS Condition Based Service 260 Cleaning displays, screens 277
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Clearance, water 221
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Climate control 193
Center armrest 211 Clothes hooks 212
283
Coasting 108 Cruise control without distance control, see

Combination switch, see Turn signals 111 Cruise control 179
Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys- Cup holder 212
tem 111, 115 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for
Comfort Access 74 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Comfort entry 69 tion 6
Compartments in the doors 211
Compass 202 D
Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-
ces 53 Damage, tires 243
Computer, see Trip computer 131 Dashboard 32, 204
Condensation on windows 196 Data memory 10
Condensation under the vehicle 222 Data protection, settings 51
Condition Based Service CBS 260 Data, see Deleting personal data 51
Configuring driving program 171 Data, technical 278
Confirmation signal 81 Date 48
Connect device 52 Date, display 127
Connecting electrical devices, see Sock- Daytime running lights 140
ets 205 DC charging cable 232
Connections 52 DCC, see Cruise control 179
Consumption, see Average consump- Decorative trim 204
tion 132 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 196
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Deleting personal data 51
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Departure schedule, see Stationary climate
Contact with water, high-voltage system 65 control 196
Continued driving with a flat tire 151, 154 Departure time, stationary climate con-
Control Display 38 trol 197
Control Display, brightness 49 Destination distance 132
Controller 39 Device list 52
Control systems, driving stability 168 Digital clock 127
Convenient closing, vehicle key 70 Digital compass 202
Convenient opening, vehicle key 69 Dimensions 278
Coolant 0 , 258 Dimmable exterior mirrors 95
Cooling, maximum 194 Dimmable interior mirror 96
Cooling system 0 , 258 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 111
Cornering light 140 Display, date 127
Corrosion on brake discs 222 Display, electronic, instrument cluster 121
Cosmetic mirror 204 Display for performance and energy recov-
Coupling, see Pairing 52 ery 122
Courtesy lights during unlocking 69 Display, GREEN Mode 226
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 70 Display, iDrive 36
Cruise control 179 Display lighting, see Instrument light-
Cruise control, active 173 ing 142
Cruise control with distance control, see Displays 120
Camera-based cruise control 173 Displays, eDRIVE system 122
Displays, high-voltage system 122
284
Disposal, coolant 259 E

Disposal, vehicle battery 266
Distance control, see PDC 181 eDRIVE drive system, driving instruc-
Distance to destination 132 tions 225
Divided screen view, split screen 38 eDRIVE, electric driving, see MINI
Drive display 122 eDRIVE 62
Drive-off assistant 171 eDrive system, at a glance 0
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 168 eDRIVE system, displays 122
Drive power, reduced 128 Electric driving 106
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Electric driving, see MINI eDRIVE 62
Safety 155 Electric range 128
Drive-ready state in detail 103 Electronic displays, instrument cluster 121
Drive-ready state, switching off 106 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see
Drive-ready state, switching on 103 DSC 168
Driver profiles 77 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 79 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Driver profiles, importing profiles 79 Emergency braking, see PostCrash -
Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv- iBrake 167
ing Modes switch 170 Emergency Request 268
Driving in detail 106 Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-
Driving instructions, breaking in 220 sistance 267
Driving instructions, eDRIVE drive sys- Emergency unlocking, transmission
tem 225 lock 106
Driving mode, GREEN 226 Energy recovery, button 108
Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy- Energy recovery, displaying 122
sis 228 Energy recovery, driving stability control
Driving modes 170 systems 168
Driving notes, general 220 Engine compartment 255
Driving notes, things to remember when Engine coolant 0 , 258
driving 220 Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic Pedes-
Driving on racetracks 223 trian Protection 108
Driving, see Drive-ready state in detail 103 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-
Driving stability control systems 168 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
Driving, Start/Stop button 102 munication 6
Driving style analysis 228 Entering an address, navigation, see Own-
Driving through water 221 er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment
Driving tip, GREEN tip 227 and Communication 6
Driving tips 220 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 168 igation, Entertainment and Communica-
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 169 tion 6
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav- Equipment, interior 199
igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Error displays, see Check Control 123
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 168 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 169 DSC 168
Exchanging, wheels and tires 243
Exhaustion warner 166
285
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni- G

tor 95
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea- Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-
ture 95 sal Remote Control 199
Exterior mirrors 94 General driving notes 220
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 95 General settings 48
External temperature display 127 Glare shield 204
External temperature warning 127 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 86
Eyes for securing cargo 214 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-
roof 84
F Glove compartment 210
GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49
Failure message, see Check Control 123 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
alarms 82 tion 6
Fan, see Air flow 195 GREEN+ - program, driving dynamics 171
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 90 GREEN Mode 226
Fatigue alert 166 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 170
Fine wood, care 276 GREEN tip, driving tip 227
First-aid kit 267 Gross vehicle weight, approved 279
Fish, MINIMALISM display 228 Ground clearance 223
Flat tire, changing wheels 251
Flat tire, continued driving 151, 154 H
Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 153
Flat tire message, FTM 153 Handbrake, electric, see Parking brake,
Flat tire message, TPM 149 electric 109
Flat Tire Monitor TPM 153 Hand-held transmitter, alternating
Flat tire, repairing 246 code 200
Flat tire, warning light 149, 153 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook
Flooding, driving through 221 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
Floor carpet, care 276 cation 6
Floor mats, care 276 Hazard warning flashers 267
Fold-away position, windshield wip- Head airbag 145
ers 114, 118 Headlight control, automatic 139
Foot brake 221 Headlight flasher 111
Forward Collision Warning with collision Headlight glass 264
mitigation 156 Headlights, care 274
For Your Own Safety 8 Head restraints and seats 87
Front airbags 144 Head restraints, front 92
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de- Head restraints, rear 93
activation 146 Head-up Display 134
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator Head-up Display, standard view 135
light 147 Heated steering wheel 96
Front seats 87 Heavy cargo, stowing 213
Fuse 266 Height, vehicle 278
286
High-beam Assistant 140 Indicator light, front-seat passenger air-

High beams 111 bags 147
High beams/low beams, see High-beam As- Indicator light, see Check Control 123
sistant 140 Individual air distribution 195
High-voltage battery, alarm signal 65 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 77
High-voltage battery, charge state indica- Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wire-
tor 122 less charging tray 206
High-voltage battery, discharge 226 Inflation pressure, tires 239
High-voltage battery, heated 108 Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 153
High-voltage battery, heavily dis- Information 6
charged 108 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 153
High-voltage battery, long stationary peri- Input, iDrive 36
ods 277 Instrument cluster 120
High-voltage system, automatic deactiva- Instrument cluster, electronic displays 121
tion 66 Instrument lighting 142
High-voltage system, contact with water 65 Integrated key 73
High-voltage system, displays 122 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
High-voltage system, safety 65 cle 60
High-voltage system, work 65 Integrated Universal Remote Control 199
Hills 222 Intelligent emergency call 268
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis- Intelligent Safety 155
tant 171 Intended use 8
Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 212 Intensity, AUTO program 195
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Interior equipment 199
Control 199 Interior lights 142
Homepage, see Internet 6 Interior lights during unlocking 69
Hood 256 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 70
Horn 32 Interior mirror 94
HUD Head-up Display 134 Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
Hydroplaning 221 ture 96
Interior mirror, compass 202
I Interior mirror, manually dimmable 95
Interior motion sensor 82
iBrake - PostCrash 167 Interval display, service notifications 128
Ice warning, see External temperature Interval mode 112, 116
warning 127 In the vicinity of the center console 34
Icy roads, see External temperature warn- In the vicinity of the roofliner 35
ing 127
Identification marks, tires 240 J
Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-
cation number 13 Jacking points for the vehicle jack 253
Illuminated ring, central instrument clus- Jam protection system, glass sunroof 86
ter 134 Jam protection system, windows 83
Increasing the range 224 Jump-starting 269
Indicator and warning lights, see Check
Control 123
287
K Location, vehicle position 49

Locking, automatic 80
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 74 Locking, from inside 74
Key, see Integrated key 73 Locking, settings 80
Key, see Vehicle key 68 Long stationary periods, high-voltage bat-
Knee airbag 145 tery 277
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-
sistant 140
L Low beams, operation 138
Lower back support, see Lumbar sup-
Label on recommended tires 244 port 88
Lane departure warning 162 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
Lane threshold, warning 162 rack 223
Language, set 48 Lumbar support 88
Lashing eyes 214
LATCH child restraint fixing system 100
Leather care 275 M
LED ring, central instrument cluster 134
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 263 Maintenance 260
Length, vehicle 278 Maintenance recommendations, see Condi-
Letters and numbers, entering 37 tion Based Service CBS 260
Level 1 charging cable, see Mode 2 charg- Maintenance, service notifications 128
ing cable 232 Maintenance system, MINI 260
Level 1 charging, see Mode 2 charging 236 Make-up mirror 204
Level 2 charging cable, see Mode 3 charg- Malfunction displays, see Check Con-
ing cable 232 trol 123
Level 3 charging cable, see DC charging ca- Manual brake, electric, see Parking brake,
ble 232 electric 109
Light-alloy wheels, care 275 Manual control, air distribution 195
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 263 Manual control, air flow 195
Lighter 204 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-
Lighting 138 trol 183
Light replacement 263 Manual operation, rearview camera 185
Light replacement, rear 264 Manual Speed Limiter 164
Lights 138 Manufacturer of the MINI 8
Lights and bulbs 263 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
Light switch 138 igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 164 Matt paint, care 275
List, instrument cluster, see Selection Maximum cooling 194
lists 131 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit
List of all messages 50 Info 129
Load 214 Maximum speed, winter tires 245
Loading 213 Measuring units 49
Loading position 215 Mechanical key 73
Loading the cargo area, see Stowing Media of the Owner's Manual 60
cargo 213 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 267
288
Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection N

lists 131
Menus, Central Information Display Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
(CID) 40 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Messages 50 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints
Messages, see Check Control 123 front 92
Microfilter 196 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints
MID - program, driving dynamics 170 rear 93
MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels,
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- care 275
tion 6 New wheels and tires 243
MINI driving modes 170 Notifications 50
MINI eDRIVE 0
MINI Electric Power Spoke 2-Tone 243
MINI logo projection during unlocking 69 O
MINI maintenance system 260
MINIMALISM analyzer 228 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 261
MINIMALISM information 228 OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 261
Minimum tread, tires 242 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 186
MINI Roadside Assistance 267 Odometer 127
Mirrors 94 Onboard literature, printed 60
Mobile communication devices in the vehi- Onboard vehicle tool kit 262
cle 221 On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-
Mobile phone, connecting 52 tance 267
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Opening and closing 68
gation, Entertainment and Communica- Opening, from inside 74
tion 6 Operating concept Central Information Dis-
Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis- play (CID) operating concept 36
tance 267 Operating menus, Central Information Dis-
Mobility System 246 play (CID) 36
Mode 2 charging 236 Operation via the Controller 40
Mode 2 charging cable 232 Operation via touchscreen 42
Mode 3 charging cable 232 Operation via voice 44
Mode 4 charging cable, see DC charging ca- Optional equipment, see Vehicle equip-
ble 232 ment 7
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Owner's Manual, printed 60
Safety 8
Moisture in headlight 264 P
Monitoring of the high-voltage battery 65
Monitor, see Control Display 38 Paint, car care 275
Mounting of child restraint systems 98 Pair device 52
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Panic alarm, see Panic mode 82
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Panic mode 82
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Panoramic glass sunroof 84
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Parallel parking assistant 187
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Park Distance Control PDC 181
289
Parked car ventilation, see Stationary cli- Radiator fluid 0 , 258

mate control 196 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Parked vehicle, condensation 222 Entertainment and Communication 6
Parking aid, see PDC 181 Rain sensor 112, 116
Parking assistant 187 Range 128
Parking brake, electric 109 Ratchet straps 214
Parking lights 138 Rear lights 264
Parts and accessories 8 Rear seat backrests, folding down 215
Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, Rearview camera 184
see Automatic Curb Monitor 95 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 94
Pathway lighting 139 Rear window defroster 196
Pathway lines, rearview camera 186 Rear window wiper, operation 114, 117
Payload, technical data 279 Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/acti-
PDC Park Distance Control 181 vated-charcoal filter 196
Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Col- Recirculated-air mode 195
lision Mitigation 159 Recommended tire brands 244
Pedestrian Protection, acoustic 108 Recuperation, button 108
Performance Control 170 Reduced drive power 128
Performance display 122 Remaining range 128
Personal data, deleting 51 Remote control, universal 199
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 77 Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand-
Phone, connecting 52 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
Plastic, care 276 munication 6
PostCrash - iBrake 167 Replacing parts 262
Power failure 266 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 71
Power windows 83 Replacing, wheels and tires 243
Pressure, tires 239 Reporting safety malfunctions 14
Printed onboard literature 60 RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise con-
Profiles, see Driver profiles 77 trol 173
Programmable memory buttons, Central In- RES CNCL button, cruise control 179
formation Display (CID) 43 Reserve warning, see Range 128
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 149
protection system 86 Retreaded tires 244
Protective function, windows, see Jam pro- Roadside parking lights 139
tection system 83 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 200
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 39 Roofliner 35
Roof-mounted luggage rack 223
Q Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
Quick charging cable, see Mode 3 charging cation 6
cable 232 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Rubber components, care 276
R Run-flat tire 245
Racetrack operation 223
290
S Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communica-
Safe braking 221 tion 6
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 261
front passenger seat 91 Sockets, electrical devices 205
Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 91 Software update 58
Safety belts 90 Software, updating 58
Safety belts, care 276 SOS button 268
Safety of the high-voltage system 65 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for
Safety systems, see Airbags 144 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Screen, see Control Display 38 tion 6
Screwdriver 262 Speech recognition 44
Sealant, see Mobility System 246 Speed Limit Device, see Speed Limiter 164
Search for charging stations, see Owner's Speed limit display, see Speed Limit
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Info 129
Communication 6 Speed Limiter 164
Seat heating, front 90 Speed Limit Info 129
Seating position for children 97 Speed limit, see Speed Limiter 164
Seats and head restraints 87 Speed, see Average speed 132
Seats, front 87 Speed warning 133
Securing, cargo 213 Split screen 38
Selection list in the instrument cluster 131 SPORT program, driving dynamics 171
Sensors, care 277 Stability control systems 168
Service and warranty 9 Standard charging cable, see Mode 2 charg-
Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis- ing cable 232
tance 267 Standard charging, see Mode 2 charg-
Service notifications, display 128 ing 236
Service notifications, see Condition Based Standard equipment, see Vehicle equip-
Service CBS 260 ment 7
Servotronic 171 Standard view, Head-up Display 135
SET button, camera-based cruise con- Standby state 102
trol 173 Stars, MINIMALISM display 228
SET button, cruise control 179 Start/Stop button 102
Setting, Control Display 49 Stationary climate control 196
Settings, general 48 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook
Settings, locking/unlocking 80 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
Settings, mirrors 94 cation 6
Settings, seats and head restraints 87 Status control display, tires 148
Side airbag 144 Status information, Central Information Dis-
Signaling, horn 32 play (CID) 37
Signals when unlocking 81 Status of Owner's Manual 7
Sitting safely 87 Status, vehicle 136
Slide/tilt glass roof 84 Steering assistance 171
Smallest turning circle, vehicle 278 Steering column adjustment 96
Smartphone, connecting 52 Steering wheel, adjusting 96
Steering wheel, buttons 32
291
Stop function in stationary vehicle 110 Tire identification marks 240

Storage, charging cable 233 Tire inflation pressure 239
Storage compartments 210 Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see
Storage, tires 245 TPM 153
Stowing, cargo 213 Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 153
Suitable devices 53 Tire pressure 239
Suitable mobile phones 53 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 148
Summer tires, tread 242 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 246
Sun visor 204 Tires 239
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60 Tires, changing 243
Supplementary text message 126 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 246
Switches, see Dashboard 32 Tires, run-flat 245
Switch for driving dynamics 170 Tire tread 242
Switching off, drive-ready state 106 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Switching on, drive-ready state 103 Entertainment and Communication 6
Symbols 6 Tools 262
Touchscreen 42
T Towing 270
TPM Flat Tire Monitor 153
Tailgate 76 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 148
Tailgate via vehicle key 70 Traction control 169
Tail lights 264 TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control,
Technical changes, see For Your Own DTC 169
Safety 8 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for
Technical data 278 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- tion 6
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Transmission lock, electronic unlock-
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for ing 106
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Transporting children safely 97
tion 6 Travel computer 132
Temperature, automatic climate con- Tread, tires 242
trol 193 Trip computer 131
Temperature display for external tempera- Triple turn signal activation 111
ture 127 Trip odometer 127
Text message, Check Control 126 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 127
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 81 Trunk, see Cargo area 213
Thigh support 89 Turning circle, vehicle 278
Third-party provider, voice assistant 46 Turning radius lines, rearview camera 186
Tilt alarm sensor 82 Turn signal, indicator light 125
Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, Turn signals, operation 111
see Automatic Curb Monitor 95 Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 264
Time 48
Time of arrival 132 U
Tire brands, recommended 244
Tire chains 250 Unintentional alarm, avoiding 82
Tire damage 243 Units, see Measuring units 49
292
Universal remote control 199 W

Unlocking, automatic 80
Unlocking, settings 80 Warning and indicator lights, see Check
Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Control 123
Updating, software 58 Warning displays, see Check Control 123
Upholstery care 275 Warning messages, see Check Control 123
Upper retaining strap, top tether 101 Warning triangle 267
USB connection 55 Warranty 8
USB port, position in vehicle 206 Washer fluid 119
Used battery, disposing of 266 Washer nozzles, windshield 114, 117
Use, intended 8 Washer system 111, 115
Using a smartphone via voice control 46 Washing the vehicle 273
Washing, vehicle 273
V Water, high-voltage system 65
Water on roads 221
Vanity mirror 204 Website 6
Vehicle battery 265 Weights 279
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis- Welcome lights 139
tance 267 Welcome lights during unlocking 69
Vehicle, breaking in 220 Wheel base, vehicle 278
Vehicle care 274 Wheels 239
Vehicle care products 274 Wheels, changing 243
Vehicle equipment 7 Width, vehicle 278
Vehicle identification number 13 Windows, powered 83
Vehicle jack 253 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer
Vehicle key, additional 71 fluid 119
Vehicle key, loss 71 Windshield washer nozzles 114, 117
Vehicle key, malfunction 72 Windshield wiper, see Wiper sys-
Vehicle key, opening/closing 68 tem 111, 115
Vehicle key, replacing the battery 71 Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-
Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 68 tion 114, 118
Vehicle paint, care 275 Winter tires, suitable tires 245
Vehicle position, vehicle location 49 Winter tires, tread 242
Vehicle status 136 Wiper blades, replacing 262
Vehicle washing 273 Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 119
Ventilation 196 Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 111, 115
Venting, see Stationary climate control 196 Wiper system 111, 115
Venting, see Ventilation 196 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wire-
Vent, see Ventilation 196 less charging tray 206
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13 Wireless charging tray for smart-
Voice assistant, third-party provider 46 phones 206
Voice command response 44 Wood, care 276
Voice control 44 Word match concept, navigation 37
Voice control system 44 Work, high-voltage system 65
Working in, engine compartment 256
Wrench 262
293
01405A2C300 ue
*BL5A2C30000Y*
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
01405A2C300 ue
*BL5A2C30000Y*

MINI Owners Manual F56 Cooper SE SOP 3-2022

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MINI Owners Manual F56 Cooper SE SOP 3-2022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Icon Meaning components results in the risk of life-threat-

Updates made after the editorial information on warranty is available from a

tact Customer Relations for further informa- Personal reference

This data can help provide a better under- Engine compartment

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number can be

Left nameplate Reporting safety defects

The vehicle identification number can also

Displays and control elements

On the driver's or front passenger's door In the vicinity of the steering

Locking the vehicle

1 Low beams, fog lights

Driver's door Buttons on the Controller

Press once: opens the previous

1 Selector lever Voice control

Terminating the voice control system

Set-up and use

Adjusting the head restraint

1. Fold the lever down.

Entering the rear Button Function

Changing the waveband/satellite

Navigation destination input

Pairing the mobile phone Using the telephone

– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Switching on drive-ready state

Engaging the gear Parking brake

Turn signal, high beams, headlight

Move the selector lever in the desired direc-

– On: press the lever past the resistance

High beams, headlight flasher Lights and lighting

Automatic headlight control.

To illuminate the vehicle on one side. Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position

– Rain sensor: position 1. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

Switching off and brief wipe

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Activating/deactivating Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

To activate: press the lever up once from its

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

Switching off and brief wipe

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Button Function Connecting the charging cable

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the

Charging the vehicle

3. Remove the cover of the charging cable

After correcting the tire inflation

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 83 Lights off

Light switch 138

Automatic headlight con- Roadside parking lights 139

Pausing, continuing cruise

Cruise control: reduce speed